2009: Year in Review

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:32
Display Headline
2009: Year in Review

From continued membership growth to increased visibility in the national media, SHM and its members have been influencing healthcare for more than a decade. But even by the highest of standards, 2009 has been a landmark year—one that demonstrated hospitalists’ collective ability to transform healthcare and improve care to the hospitalized patient.

“The momentum of the hospital medicine movement has been growing for years, and 2009 has been no exception,” says Scott Flanders, MD, FHM, president of SHM. “This year built on the successes of the past and plainly illustrated the impact that hospital medicine will have on the future of healthcare.”

Groundbreaking QI Programs Go Nationwide

This year, SHM and its members began to tackle some of the most pressing QI issues in healthcare: reducing readmissions to the hospital and glycemic control. New research in the New England Journal of Medicine couldn’t have made the need for reducing readmissions any clearer: Unplanned hospital readmissions cost Medicare $17.4 billion annually.1

TOMOGRAF/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

SHM’s Project BOOST (Better Outcomes for Older Adults through Safe Transitions) helps hospitals implement customized programs to reduce readmissions through improved discharge processes. Hospitalists who enroll in the yearlong program take advantage of a one-on-one mentorship arrangement with experts in the field. Participants can also access the Project BOOST resource toolkit.

Project BOOST began in six pilot hospital sites in 2008 and added 24 new sites in March 2009. The program’s leaders are looking forward to further expansion in 2010. “The response to Project BOOST has been overwhelmingly positive. Given today’s healthcare climate, we know its impact will be even greater in years to come,” says Jane Kelly-Cummings, RN, CPHQ, SHM’s senior director of quality initiatives. “There is a very serious need to improve discharge processes in hospitals across the country. With Project BOOST, hospitalists are taking the initiative to ensure a smooth transition from hospital to home.”

SHM also launched the Glycemic Control Mentored Implementation (GCMI) program. Like Project BOOST, GCMI uses a combination of one-on-one mentorships and customized resources to assist hospitalists with QI program implementation.

GCMI takes on another common chronic issue hospitalists face daily: managing glycemic levels in hospitalized patients. The GCMI program is currently in 30 sites across the country.

With Project BOOST, hospitalists are taking the initiative to ensure a smooth transition from hospital to home.

—Jane Kelly-Cummings, RN, CPHQ, SHM’s senior director of quality initiatives

HM09 Draws Capacity Crowd in Chicago

In an economic climate that forced many industries’ annual meetings to be canceled, delayed, or scaled back, Hospital Medicine 2009 (HM09) in Chicago exceeded expectations. SHM had expected about 1,500 participants in the annual conference; organizers were pleasantly surprised to receive more than 2,000 registrations for the May event. The demand for exhibition space also surpassed projections.

“We’ve long known that hospitalists see real value in a meeting specifically designed for them, with relevant educational sessions and plenty of time for networking,” says Geri Barnes, SHM’s senior director of education and meetings. “Each year, we’ve received more and more interest in the annual conference, but the response to our 2009 conference was unprecedented.”

HM10 is April 8-11 at the Gaylord National Hotel and Convention Center in Washington, D.C.

SHM, MGMA Form Research Partnership

Beginning in 2010, SHM and the Medical Group Management Association (MGMA) will team up to give hospitalists and healthcare executives an even clearer picture on hospitalist compensation and productivity.

Prior to the partnership, SHM had conducted its own research. Now, hospitals and HM managers will have new data at their fingertips, and additional analysis and name-brand recognition of one of the leaders in medical practice research. The first round of research will be available in summer 2010. SHM and MGMA already have collaborated on educational webinars for hospitalists, and SHM is offering books published by MGMA on its Web site.

 

 

“This new alliance will pay dividends for years to come,” says Leslie Flores, the director of SHM’s Practice Management Institute. “The information from our compensation and productivity surveys has always been valuable to hospitals. Having the MGMA name attached to next year’s product will only increase its significance and usefulness.”

Hospitalists will receive the joint survey questionnaire from SHM and MGMA in January.

Fellow in Hospital medicine Spotlight

Penny McDonald, MD, FACP, FHM

Dr. McDonald is a practicing hospitalist with Inpatient Physicians of Forsyth at Forsyth Memorial Hospital in Winston-Salem, N.C.

Undergraduate education: High Point University, High Point, N.C.

Medical school: East Carolina University School of Medicine, Greenville, N.C.

Notable: Dr. McDonald has been a practicing hospitalist since 1997 and an SHM member since 1999. She has served on the physician leadership board and ethics committee at Forsyth. She has been published in the Archives of Internal Medicine.

FYI: Outside the hospital, Dr. McDonald is an avid hiker and loves to travel. Last year, she reached her own personal goal of visiting all 50 states. Her new goal is to visit every national park in the U.S.

Quotable: “I have a secret desire that our specialty be renamed. Describing us as ‘hospitalists,’ based on where we practice, doesn’t seem to cover it. I think ‘medical complexity specialist’ would be more fitting and would encompass all of what we do.”

For more information about the FHM program, visit www.hospitalmedicine.org/fellows.

HM Fellows

Three letters can mean a lot, especially for hospitalists looking for ways to demonstrate their commitment to the specialty. This year was the first in which qualified hospitalists could earn the Fellow in Hospital Medicine (FHM) designation. The first class of more than 500 FHM designees was introduced in an on-stage ceremony at HM09.

“This is a special way for SHM—and the healthcare industry as a whole—to recognize the unique achievements and dedication that hospital medicine requires,” says Todd Von Deak, MBA, CAE, SHM’s vice president for marketing and membership. “As the specialty grows in number and influence, so will the fellows program.”

In 2010, SHM will induct the first class of Senior Fellows in Hospital Medicine (SFHM). While the process for applying for the senior designation will be similar to the FHM designation, the SFHM will require additional years of practice and leadership in the specialty.

The fellows program also features the Master in Hospital Medicine (MHM) designation, the highest level of recognition available. The MHM will be available in 2011, and the nomination process will be invitation-only.

Outside Recognition

SHM isn’t the only group recognizing the impact hospitalists are making on healthcare. In September, the American Board of Internal Medicine (ABIM) announced that hospitalists will be able to apply for Recognition of Focused Practice (RFP) in Hospital Medicine as part of ABIM’s maintenance of certification (MOC) program. The application process will be available as early as next month.

SHM will be assisting hospitalists in the application process through online resources and the MOC pre-course, which will be offered before HM10. Hospitalists with three years of experience in the field can apply for the RFP program. Although most physicians are required to recertify every 10 years, hospitalists won’t have to wait until their certification is up to apply for focused recognition. For more information about the RFP in HM program, visit www.abim.org.

Hospital-Provider Partners

Treating hospitalized patients has always been a team sport. From caseworkers and pharmacists to physicians and critical-care nurses, the diverse and specialized needs of hospital care demand collaboration and coordination.

That’s the idea behind the Hospital Care Collaborative (HCC), which convened for the first time in 2009. The group is made up of six national organizations that represent hundreds of thousands of care providers. The HCC has developed and published “Common Principles for Team-Based Healthcare.” The principles emphasize the need for teamwork within the hospital setting and a focus on the patient.

 

 

As part of its goals for the future, the HCC will identify best practices in teamwork and promote educational programs that encourage interdisciplinary teams.

Look Back, Look Forward

For SHM CEO Larry Wellikson, MD, FHM, the end of 2009 is an opportunity to look forward to 2010 and beyond. “Ten years ago, hospital medicine was little more than an idea,” he says. “Today, it is a growing medical specialty, recognized by leaders in healthcare and public policy, with thousands of experienced and enthusiastic hospitalists throughout the country.

“I am confident that when we look back ten years from now, we will see a hospital landscape transformed for the better, and that hospitalists and the rest of the new healthcare team will have played an important role.”­ TH

Brendon Shank is a freelance writer based in Philadelphia.

Reference

  1. Jencks SF, Williams MV, Coleman A. Rehospitaliza- tions among patients in the Medicare fee-for-service program. N Engl J Med. 2009;360(14):1418-1428.

Chapter Updates

Los Angeles

The Los Angeles chapter met Sept. 24 at Craft restaurant. The event was hosted by Manoj K. Mathew, MD, FHM. The presentation, “An Update in Hospital Medicine,” was offered by Joseph Li, MD, FHM, director of hospitalist services at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston and an SHM board member. Nearly 30 attendees from 10 hospitalist organizations attended the meeting. The next Los Angeles chapter meeting is scheduled for January 2010.

Southwest Wisconsin

Transitions of care was the featured topic at the Aug. 6 Southwest Wisconsin chapter meeting. Monica Anderson, director of business development at Select Specialty Hospital in Madison, presented valuable information about the role long-term acute-care hospitals play in a patient’s continuum of care. Following the presentation, attendees discussed ways in which hospitalists can collaborate across HM groups to address patient care and quality issues that are common to hospitalist practices.

Philadelphia Tri-State Area

The Philadelphia Tri-State Area chapter met Sept. 30 at Ristorante Panorama. About 20 hospitalists attended the event, which was sponsored by the France Foundation.

Todd Hecht, MD, of the University of Pennsylvania lectured on DVT prophylaxis. Chapter founder Jennifer Myers, MD, FHM, preceded the lecture by announcing she was stepping down as co-president after a six-year tenure. She thanked the audience for their support and introduced Susan Krekun, MD, chair of the division of hospital medicine at Jefferson University Hospital in Philadelphia, as the new chapter co-president.

The chapter sponsored a job fair Nov. 19 at the downtown Marriott. Medical directors from more than 10 programs attended the event to meet aspiring hospitalists and discuss the state of hospital medicine in the Philadelphia area.

Indiana

TOMOGRAF/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM
TOMOGRAF/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

The Indiana chapter held a meeting Sept. 2 at Maggiano’s Italian Restaurant in Indianapolis. The meeting was sponsored by AstraZeneca and featured a meet-and-greet before the regular program. Attendees were treated to a report about SHM’s recent Leadership Academy in Miami, and election results were revealed.

Angela Corea, MD, announced the 2010 chapter election nomination results: vice president, John Gilbert, MD, unopposed; secretary, Robert Blessing, MD, unopposed; president, Angela Corea, MD, Raphael Villavicencio, MD, and Gordon Reed, MD, FHM. All three chapter president nominees addressed the attendees.

David Mares, MD, held a question-and-answer session to discuss “New Maintenance Options for the Treatment of COPD.” Drs. Reed and Corea discussed the results of the SHM survey. The meeting concluded with a secret ballot.

Nashville and Middle Tennessee

The Nashville and Middle Tennessee chapter met Oct. 27, with 16 attendees representing eight local hospitals. The speaker, Anton Maki, MD, of Kingsport, presented a thorough review of the microbiology and antimicrobial treatment recommendations for community-acquired pneumonia (CAP). Attendees also were provided information about upcoming SHM conferences and training academies, the application process for the fellowship program, and plans for the ABIM Recognition of Focused Practice in Hospital Medicine certification.

Boston

Anita Barry, the infectious-disease bureau chief and director of communicable-disease control for the Boston Public Health Commission, spoke to nearly 60 hospitalists and guests during the Sept. 10 Boston chapter meeting at Legal Sea Foods. Dr. Barry’s topic was the H1N1 virus. The next chapter event is a clinical investigator training course Dec. 10-11 at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston. Anyone interested in learning more about conducting clinical trials can attend. This course is not limited to physicians; nurses and others are encouraged to attend. There is no fee to attend Boston chapter events. For more information or to RSVP, contact Dr. Li at [email protected] or 617-632-0205.

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Sections

From continued membership growth to increased visibility in the national media, SHM and its members have been influencing healthcare for more than a decade. But even by the highest of standards, 2009 has been a landmark year—one that demonstrated hospitalists’ collective ability to transform healthcare and improve care to the hospitalized patient.

“The momentum of the hospital medicine movement has been growing for years, and 2009 has been no exception,” says Scott Flanders, MD, FHM, president of SHM. “This year built on the successes of the past and plainly illustrated the impact that hospital medicine will have on the future of healthcare.”

Groundbreaking QI Programs Go Nationwide

This year, SHM and its members began to tackle some of the most pressing QI issues in healthcare: reducing readmissions to the hospital and glycemic control. New research in the New England Journal of Medicine couldn’t have made the need for reducing readmissions any clearer: Unplanned hospital readmissions cost Medicare $17.4 billion annually.1

TOMOGRAF/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

SHM’s Project BOOST (Better Outcomes for Older Adults through Safe Transitions) helps hospitals implement customized programs to reduce readmissions through improved discharge processes. Hospitalists who enroll in the yearlong program take advantage of a one-on-one mentorship arrangement with experts in the field. Participants can also access the Project BOOST resource toolkit.

Project BOOST began in six pilot hospital sites in 2008 and added 24 new sites in March 2009. The program’s leaders are looking forward to further expansion in 2010. “The response to Project BOOST has been overwhelmingly positive. Given today’s healthcare climate, we know its impact will be even greater in years to come,” says Jane Kelly-Cummings, RN, CPHQ, SHM’s senior director of quality initiatives. “There is a very serious need to improve discharge processes in hospitals across the country. With Project BOOST, hospitalists are taking the initiative to ensure a smooth transition from hospital to home.”

SHM also launched the Glycemic Control Mentored Implementation (GCMI) program. Like Project BOOST, GCMI uses a combination of one-on-one mentorships and customized resources to assist hospitalists with QI program implementation.

GCMI takes on another common chronic issue hospitalists face daily: managing glycemic levels in hospitalized patients. The GCMI program is currently in 30 sites across the country.

With Project BOOST, hospitalists are taking the initiative to ensure a smooth transition from hospital to home.

—Jane Kelly-Cummings, RN, CPHQ, SHM’s senior director of quality initiatives

HM09 Draws Capacity Crowd in Chicago

In an economic climate that forced many industries’ annual meetings to be canceled, delayed, or scaled back, Hospital Medicine 2009 (HM09) in Chicago exceeded expectations. SHM had expected about 1,500 participants in the annual conference; organizers were pleasantly surprised to receive more than 2,000 registrations for the May event. The demand for exhibition space also surpassed projections.

“We’ve long known that hospitalists see real value in a meeting specifically designed for them, with relevant educational sessions and plenty of time for networking,” says Geri Barnes, SHM’s senior director of education and meetings. “Each year, we’ve received more and more interest in the annual conference, but the response to our 2009 conference was unprecedented.”

HM10 is April 8-11 at the Gaylord National Hotel and Convention Center in Washington, D.C.

SHM, MGMA Form Research Partnership

Beginning in 2010, SHM and the Medical Group Management Association (MGMA) will team up to give hospitalists and healthcare executives an even clearer picture on hospitalist compensation and productivity.

Prior to the partnership, SHM had conducted its own research. Now, hospitals and HM managers will have new data at their fingertips, and additional analysis and name-brand recognition of one of the leaders in medical practice research. The first round of research will be available in summer 2010. SHM and MGMA already have collaborated on educational webinars for hospitalists, and SHM is offering books published by MGMA on its Web site.

 

 

“This new alliance will pay dividends for years to come,” says Leslie Flores, the director of SHM’s Practice Management Institute. “The information from our compensation and productivity surveys has always been valuable to hospitals. Having the MGMA name attached to next year’s product will only increase its significance and usefulness.”

Hospitalists will receive the joint survey questionnaire from SHM and MGMA in January.

Fellow in Hospital medicine Spotlight

Penny McDonald, MD, FACP, FHM

Dr. McDonald is a practicing hospitalist with Inpatient Physicians of Forsyth at Forsyth Memorial Hospital in Winston-Salem, N.C.

Undergraduate education: High Point University, High Point, N.C.

Medical school: East Carolina University School of Medicine, Greenville, N.C.

Notable: Dr. McDonald has been a practicing hospitalist since 1997 and an SHM member since 1999. She has served on the physician leadership board and ethics committee at Forsyth. She has been published in the Archives of Internal Medicine.

FYI: Outside the hospital, Dr. McDonald is an avid hiker and loves to travel. Last year, she reached her own personal goal of visiting all 50 states. Her new goal is to visit every national park in the U.S.

Quotable: “I have a secret desire that our specialty be renamed. Describing us as ‘hospitalists,’ based on where we practice, doesn’t seem to cover it. I think ‘medical complexity specialist’ would be more fitting and would encompass all of what we do.”

For more information about the FHM program, visit www.hospitalmedicine.org/fellows.

HM Fellows

Three letters can mean a lot, especially for hospitalists looking for ways to demonstrate their commitment to the specialty. This year was the first in which qualified hospitalists could earn the Fellow in Hospital Medicine (FHM) designation. The first class of more than 500 FHM designees was introduced in an on-stage ceremony at HM09.

“This is a special way for SHM—and the healthcare industry as a whole—to recognize the unique achievements and dedication that hospital medicine requires,” says Todd Von Deak, MBA, CAE, SHM’s vice president for marketing and membership. “As the specialty grows in number and influence, so will the fellows program.”

In 2010, SHM will induct the first class of Senior Fellows in Hospital Medicine (SFHM). While the process for applying for the senior designation will be similar to the FHM designation, the SFHM will require additional years of practice and leadership in the specialty.

The fellows program also features the Master in Hospital Medicine (MHM) designation, the highest level of recognition available. The MHM will be available in 2011, and the nomination process will be invitation-only.

Outside Recognition

SHM isn’t the only group recognizing the impact hospitalists are making on healthcare. In September, the American Board of Internal Medicine (ABIM) announced that hospitalists will be able to apply for Recognition of Focused Practice (RFP) in Hospital Medicine as part of ABIM’s maintenance of certification (MOC) program. The application process will be available as early as next month.

SHM will be assisting hospitalists in the application process through online resources and the MOC pre-course, which will be offered before HM10. Hospitalists with three years of experience in the field can apply for the RFP program. Although most physicians are required to recertify every 10 years, hospitalists won’t have to wait until their certification is up to apply for focused recognition. For more information about the RFP in HM program, visit www.abim.org.

Hospital-Provider Partners

Treating hospitalized patients has always been a team sport. From caseworkers and pharmacists to physicians and critical-care nurses, the diverse and specialized needs of hospital care demand collaboration and coordination.

That’s the idea behind the Hospital Care Collaborative (HCC), which convened for the first time in 2009. The group is made up of six national organizations that represent hundreds of thousands of care providers. The HCC has developed and published “Common Principles for Team-Based Healthcare.” The principles emphasize the need for teamwork within the hospital setting and a focus on the patient.

 

 

As part of its goals for the future, the HCC will identify best practices in teamwork and promote educational programs that encourage interdisciplinary teams.

Look Back, Look Forward

For SHM CEO Larry Wellikson, MD, FHM, the end of 2009 is an opportunity to look forward to 2010 and beyond. “Ten years ago, hospital medicine was little more than an idea,” he says. “Today, it is a growing medical specialty, recognized by leaders in healthcare and public policy, with thousands of experienced and enthusiastic hospitalists throughout the country.

“I am confident that when we look back ten years from now, we will see a hospital landscape transformed for the better, and that hospitalists and the rest of the new healthcare team will have played an important role.”­ TH

Brendon Shank is a freelance writer based in Philadelphia.

Reference

  1. Jencks SF, Williams MV, Coleman A. Rehospitaliza- tions among patients in the Medicare fee-for-service program. N Engl J Med. 2009;360(14):1418-1428.

Chapter Updates

Los Angeles

The Los Angeles chapter met Sept. 24 at Craft restaurant. The event was hosted by Manoj K. Mathew, MD, FHM. The presentation, “An Update in Hospital Medicine,” was offered by Joseph Li, MD, FHM, director of hospitalist services at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston and an SHM board member. Nearly 30 attendees from 10 hospitalist organizations attended the meeting. The next Los Angeles chapter meeting is scheduled for January 2010.

Southwest Wisconsin

Transitions of care was the featured topic at the Aug. 6 Southwest Wisconsin chapter meeting. Monica Anderson, director of business development at Select Specialty Hospital in Madison, presented valuable information about the role long-term acute-care hospitals play in a patient’s continuum of care. Following the presentation, attendees discussed ways in which hospitalists can collaborate across HM groups to address patient care and quality issues that are common to hospitalist practices.

Philadelphia Tri-State Area

The Philadelphia Tri-State Area chapter met Sept. 30 at Ristorante Panorama. About 20 hospitalists attended the event, which was sponsored by the France Foundation.

Todd Hecht, MD, of the University of Pennsylvania lectured on DVT prophylaxis. Chapter founder Jennifer Myers, MD, FHM, preceded the lecture by announcing she was stepping down as co-president after a six-year tenure. She thanked the audience for their support and introduced Susan Krekun, MD, chair of the division of hospital medicine at Jefferson University Hospital in Philadelphia, as the new chapter co-president.

The chapter sponsored a job fair Nov. 19 at the downtown Marriott. Medical directors from more than 10 programs attended the event to meet aspiring hospitalists and discuss the state of hospital medicine in the Philadelphia area.

Indiana

TOMOGRAF/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM
TOMOGRAF/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

The Indiana chapter held a meeting Sept. 2 at Maggiano’s Italian Restaurant in Indianapolis. The meeting was sponsored by AstraZeneca and featured a meet-and-greet before the regular program. Attendees were treated to a report about SHM’s recent Leadership Academy in Miami, and election results were revealed.

Angela Corea, MD, announced the 2010 chapter election nomination results: vice president, John Gilbert, MD, unopposed; secretary, Robert Blessing, MD, unopposed; president, Angela Corea, MD, Raphael Villavicencio, MD, and Gordon Reed, MD, FHM. All three chapter president nominees addressed the attendees.

David Mares, MD, held a question-and-answer session to discuss “New Maintenance Options for the Treatment of COPD.” Drs. Reed and Corea discussed the results of the SHM survey. The meeting concluded with a secret ballot.

Nashville and Middle Tennessee

The Nashville and Middle Tennessee chapter met Oct. 27, with 16 attendees representing eight local hospitals. The speaker, Anton Maki, MD, of Kingsport, presented a thorough review of the microbiology and antimicrobial treatment recommendations for community-acquired pneumonia (CAP). Attendees also were provided information about upcoming SHM conferences and training academies, the application process for the fellowship program, and plans for the ABIM Recognition of Focused Practice in Hospital Medicine certification.

Boston

Anita Barry, the infectious-disease bureau chief and director of communicable-disease control for the Boston Public Health Commission, spoke to nearly 60 hospitalists and guests during the Sept. 10 Boston chapter meeting at Legal Sea Foods. Dr. Barry’s topic was the H1N1 virus. The next chapter event is a clinical investigator training course Dec. 10-11 at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston. Anyone interested in learning more about conducting clinical trials can attend. This course is not limited to physicians; nurses and others are encouraged to attend. There is no fee to attend Boston chapter events. For more information or to RSVP, contact Dr. Li at [email protected] or 617-632-0205.

From continued membership growth to increased visibility in the national media, SHM and its members have been influencing healthcare for more than a decade. But even by the highest of standards, 2009 has been a landmark year—one that demonstrated hospitalists’ collective ability to transform healthcare and improve care to the hospitalized patient.

“The momentum of the hospital medicine movement has been growing for years, and 2009 has been no exception,” says Scott Flanders, MD, FHM, president of SHM. “This year built on the successes of the past and plainly illustrated the impact that hospital medicine will have on the future of healthcare.”

Groundbreaking QI Programs Go Nationwide

This year, SHM and its members began to tackle some of the most pressing QI issues in healthcare: reducing readmissions to the hospital and glycemic control. New research in the New England Journal of Medicine couldn’t have made the need for reducing readmissions any clearer: Unplanned hospital readmissions cost Medicare $17.4 billion annually.1

TOMOGRAF/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

SHM’s Project BOOST (Better Outcomes for Older Adults through Safe Transitions) helps hospitals implement customized programs to reduce readmissions through improved discharge processes. Hospitalists who enroll in the yearlong program take advantage of a one-on-one mentorship arrangement with experts in the field. Participants can also access the Project BOOST resource toolkit.

Project BOOST began in six pilot hospital sites in 2008 and added 24 new sites in March 2009. The program’s leaders are looking forward to further expansion in 2010. “The response to Project BOOST has been overwhelmingly positive. Given today’s healthcare climate, we know its impact will be even greater in years to come,” says Jane Kelly-Cummings, RN, CPHQ, SHM’s senior director of quality initiatives. “There is a very serious need to improve discharge processes in hospitals across the country. With Project BOOST, hospitalists are taking the initiative to ensure a smooth transition from hospital to home.”

SHM also launched the Glycemic Control Mentored Implementation (GCMI) program. Like Project BOOST, GCMI uses a combination of one-on-one mentorships and customized resources to assist hospitalists with QI program implementation.

GCMI takes on another common chronic issue hospitalists face daily: managing glycemic levels in hospitalized patients. The GCMI program is currently in 30 sites across the country.

With Project BOOST, hospitalists are taking the initiative to ensure a smooth transition from hospital to home.

—Jane Kelly-Cummings, RN, CPHQ, SHM’s senior director of quality initiatives

HM09 Draws Capacity Crowd in Chicago

In an economic climate that forced many industries’ annual meetings to be canceled, delayed, or scaled back, Hospital Medicine 2009 (HM09) in Chicago exceeded expectations. SHM had expected about 1,500 participants in the annual conference; organizers were pleasantly surprised to receive more than 2,000 registrations for the May event. The demand for exhibition space also surpassed projections.

“We’ve long known that hospitalists see real value in a meeting specifically designed for them, with relevant educational sessions and plenty of time for networking,” says Geri Barnes, SHM’s senior director of education and meetings. “Each year, we’ve received more and more interest in the annual conference, but the response to our 2009 conference was unprecedented.”

HM10 is April 8-11 at the Gaylord National Hotel and Convention Center in Washington, D.C.

SHM, MGMA Form Research Partnership

Beginning in 2010, SHM and the Medical Group Management Association (MGMA) will team up to give hospitalists and healthcare executives an even clearer picture on hospitalist compensation and productivity.

Prior to the partnership, SHM had conducted its own research. Now, hospitals and HM managers will have new data at their fingertips, and additional analysis and name-brand recognition of one of the leaders in medical practice research. The first round of research will be available in summer 2010. SHM and MGMA already have collaborated on educational webinars for hospitalists, and SHM is offering books published by MGMA on its Web site.

 

 

“This new alliance will pay dividends for years to come,” says Leslie Flores, the director of SHM’s Practice Management Institute. “The information from our compensation and productivity surveys has always been valuable to hospitals. Having the MGMA name attached to next year’s product will only increase its significance and usefulness.”

Hospitalists will receive the joint survey questionnaire from SHM and MGMA in January.

Fellow in Hospital medicine Spotlight

Penny McDonald, MD, FACP, FHM

Dr. McDonald is a practicing hospitalist with Inpatient Physicians of Forsyth at Forsyth Memorial Hospital in Winston-Salem, N.C.

Undergraduate education: High Point University, High Point, N.C.

Medical school: East Carolina University School of Medicine, Greenville, N.C.

Notable: Dr. McDonald has been a practicing hospitalist since 1997 and an SHM member since 1999. She has served on the physician leadership board and ethics committee at Forsyth. She has been published in the Archives of Internal Medicine.

FYI: Outside the hospital, Dr. McDonald is an avid hiker and loves to travel. Last year, she reached her own personal goal of visiting all 50 states. Her new goal is to visit every national park in the U.S.

Quotable: “I have a secret desire that our specialty be renamed. Describing us as ‘hospitalists,’ based on where we practice, doesn’t seem to cover it. I think ‘medical complexity specialist’ would be more fitting and would encompass all of what we do.”

For more information about the FHM program, visit www.hospitalmedicine.org/fellows.

HM Fellows

Three letters can mean a lot, especially for hospitalists looking for ways to demonstrate their commitment to the specialty. This year was the first in which qualified hospitalists could earn the Fellow in Hospital Medicine (FHM) designation. The first class of more than 500 FHM designees was introduced in an on-stage ceremony at HM09.

“This is a special way for SHM—and the healthcare industry as a whole—to recognize the unique achievements and dedication that hospital medicine requires,” says Todd Von Deak, MBA, CAE, SHM’s vice president for marketing and membership. “As the specialty grows in number and influence, so will the fellows program.”

In 2010, SHM will induct the first class of Senior Fellows in Hospital Medicine (SFHM). While the process for applying for the senior designation will be similar to the FHM designation, the SFHM will require additional years of practice and leadership in the specialty.

The fellows program also features the Master in Hospital Medicine (MHM) designation, the highest level of recognition available. The MHM will be available in 2011, and the nomination process will be invitation-only.

Outside Recognition

SHM isn’t the only group recognizing the impact hospitalists are making on healthcare. In September, the American Board of Internal Medicine (ABIM) announced that hospitalists will be able to apply for Recognition of Focused Practice (RFP) in Hospital Medicine as part of ABIM’s maintenance of certification (MOC) program. The application process will be available as early as next month.

SHM will be assisting hospitalists in the application process through online resources and the MOC pre-course, which will be offered before HM10. Hospitalists with three years of experience in the field can apply for the RFP program. Although most physicians are required to recertify every 10 years, hospitalists won’t have to wait until their certification is up to apply for focused recognition. For more information about the RFP in HM program, visit www.abim.org.

Hospital-Provider Partners

Treating hospitalized patients has always been a team sport. From caseworkers and pharmacists to physicians and critical-care nurses, the diverse and specialized needs of hospital care demand collaboration and coordination.

That’s the idea behind the Hospital Care Collaborative (HCC), which convened for the first time in 2009. The group is made up of six national organizations that represent hundreds of thousands of care providers. The HCC has developed and published “Common Principles for Team-Based Healthcare.” The principles emphasize the need for teamwork within the hospital setting and a focus on the patient.

 

 

As part of its goals for the future, the HCC will identify best practices in teamwork and promote educational programs that encourage interdisciplinary teams.

Look Back, Look Forward

For SHM CEO Larry Wellikson, MD, FHM, the end of 2009 is an opportunity to look forward to 2010 and beyond. “Ten years ago, hospital medicine was little more than an idea,” he says. “Today, it is a growing medical specialty, recognized by leaders in healthcare and public policy, with thousands of experienced and enthusiastic hospitalists throughout the country.

“I am confident that when we look back ten years from now, we will see a hospital landscape transformed for the better, and that hospitalists and the rest of the new healthcare team will have played an important role.”­ TH

Brendon Shank is a freelance writer based in Philadelphia.

Reference

  1. Jencks SF, Williams MV, Coleman A. Rehospitaliza- tions among patients in the Medicare fee-for-service program. N Engl J Med. 2009;360(14):1418-1428.

Chapter Updates

Los Angeles

The Los Angeles chapter met Sept. 24 at Craft restaurant. The event was hosted by Manoj K. Mathew, MD, FHM. The presentation, “An Update in Hospital Medicine,” was offered by Joseph Li, MD, FHM, director of hospitalist services at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston and an SHM board member. Nearly 30 attendees from 10 hospitalist organizations attended the meeting. The next Los Angeles chapter meeting is scheduled for January 2010.

Southwest Wisconsin

Transitions of care was the featured topic at the Aug. 6 Southwest Wisconsin chapter meeting. Monica Anderson, director of business development at Select Specialty Hospital in Madison, presented valuable information about the role long-term acute-care hospitals play in a patient’s continuum of care. Following the presentation, attendees discussed ways in which hospitalists can collaborate across HM groups to address patient care and quality issues that are common to hospitalist practices.

Philadelphia Tri-State Area

The Philadelphia Tri-State Area chapter met Sept. 30 at Ristorante Panorama. About 20 hospitalists attended the event, which was sponsored by the France Foundation.

Todd Hecht, MD, of the University of Pennsylvania lectured on DVT prophylaxis. Chapter founder Jennifer Myers, MD, FHM, preceded the lecture by announcing she was stepping down as co-president after a six-year tenure. She thanked the audience for their support and introduced Susan Krekun, MD, chair of the division of hospital medicine at Jefferson University Hospital in Philadelphia, as the new chapter co-president.

The chapter sponsored a job fair Nov. 19 at the downtown Marriott. Medical directors from more than 10 programs attended the event to meet aspiring hospitalists and discuss the state of hospital medicine in the Philadelphia area.

Indiana

TOMOGRAF/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM
TOMOGRAF/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

The Indiana chapter held a meeting Sept. 2 at Maggiano’s Italian Restaurant in Indianapolis. The meeting was sponsored by AstraZeneca and featured a meet-and-greet before the regular program. Attendees were treated to a report about SHM’s recent Leadership Academy in Miami, and election results were revealed.

Angela Corea, MD, announced the 2010 chapter election nomination results: vice president, John Gilbert, MD, unopposed; secretary, Robert Blessing, MD, unopposed; president, Angela Corea, MD, Raphael Villavicencio, MD, and Gordon Reed, MD, FHM. All three chapter president nominees addressed the attendees.

David Mares, MD, held a question-and-answer session to discuss “New Maintenance Options for the Treatment of COPD.” Drs. Reed and Corea discussed the results of the SHM survey. The meeting concluded with a secret ballot.

Nashville and Middle Tennessee

The Nashville and Middle Tennessee chapter met Oct. 27, with 16 attendees representing eight local hospitals. The speaker, Anton Maki, MD, of Kingsport, presented a thorough review of the microbiology and antimicrobial treatment recommendations for community-acquired pneumonia (CAP). Attendees also were provided information about upcoming SHM conferences and training academies, the application process for the fellowship program, and plans for the ABIM Recognition of Focused Practice in Hospital Medicine certification.

Boston

Anita Barry, the infectious-disease bureau chief and director of communicable-disease control for the Boston Public Health Commission, spoke to nearly 60 hospitalists and guests during the Sept. 10 Boston chapter meeting at Legal Sea Foods. Dr. Barry’s topic was the H1N1 virus. The next chapter event is a clinical investigator training course Dec. 10-11 at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston. Anyone interested in learning more about conducting clinical trials can attend. This course is not limited to physicians; nurses and others are encouraged to attend. There is no fee to attend Boston chapter events. For more information or to RSVP, contact Dr. Li at [email protected] or 617-632-0205.

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
2009: Year in Review
Display Headline
2009: Year in Review
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

Spotlight on Stroke

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:32
Display Headline
Spotlight on Stroke

Ethan Cumbler, MD, is board-certified in internal medicine and pediatrics, and has practiced hospital medicine for six years, first at a community hospital and now at the University of Colorado Denver (UCD), where he directs the Acute Care for the Elderly service. The prevalence of stroke in his practice and the daily challenges of managing stroke patients led Dr. Cumbler to seek additional training in stroke care. He is the hospitalist representative to the UCD stroke council, a researcher in the arena of acute stroke care, and is helping UCD become a Joint Commission-certified stroke center.

“There are a variety of roles for the hospitalist in stroke care,” Dr. Cumbler says, explaining that HM physicians can be admitting attendings for stroke patients or part of acute stroke teams, and participate in decisions to start such treatments as intravenous recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA), the Food and Drug Administration-approved clot-busting therapy. “[Hospitalists] can be medical consultants on stroke patients admitted to other hospital services, managing common comorbid conditions such as blood pressure and glucose levels, which have particular character for patients immediately post-stroke.”

Stroke is the third-leading cause of death in the U.S., as well as a leading cause of serious, long-term disability. How many stroke patients are seen by hospitalists is not known, but it is reasonable to assume that a majority of hospitalized stroke patients will encounter a hospitalist, if not for acute treatment, then for ongoing medical management.

Some hospitalists think stroke and transient ischemic attacks (TIAs)—temporary neurological deficits sometimes called “mini-strokes,” and a major risk factor for full-blown strokes—are among the most common diseases seen by hospitalists.1 Acute stroke care is a growing part of HM practice because neurologist availability in emergent situations varies widely between hospitals. The rapid evolution of stroke treatment and the time-sensitive needs of stroke patients represents a huge opportunity for hospitalists to fill that void for their hospitals—whether they want to or not.

“I think hospitalists are fully capable of learning and mastering stroke care, but it requires both interest and training,” Dr. Cumbler says.

Stroke Guidelines, Resources, and Training Options

HM Can Help Fill a Void

According to the American Heart Association (AHA), there are four neurologists per 100,000 Americans, and not all of those neurologists specialize in stroke care.2 The scarcity of neurological specialists means that in many hospitals, a neurologist won’t be available for the critical assessment and treatment decisions required in the first few hours after a stroke is diagnosed. Yet many hospitalists complain that their preparation during internal-medicine residency did not equip them to care for acute stroke patients.3

S. Andrew Josephson, MD, a neurovascular physician and director of the neurohospitalist program at the University of California at San Francisco Medical Center, says the number of hospitalists on the front lines of acute stroke care is growing every day. “A new stroke is a very treatable neurological emergency that requires ultra-fast intervention,”7 Dr. Josephson says, “and hospitalists, increasingly, are the people who matter most in that intervention.” The reason, in most cases, is hospitalists are available at all times, and neurologists aren’t.

 

 

Given variable access to neurologists at the time of urgent need in many hospitals, the actions hospitalists can take in acute stroke management include:

  • Become better trained in stroke care. Sessions on stroke management are included in numerous HM educational programs, including SHM conferences and in continuing medical education (CME) offerings from such groups as the American Academy of Neurology (see “Stroke Training, Resources, and Opportunities,” p. 30).
  • Partner with neurologists in your hospital. One trend is to develop a neurohospitalist practice.
  • Push for increased organization and response times for stroke patients. Given HM’s focus on quality and patient safety, hospitalists are natural champions for improving systems of care for stroke. Hospitalists can work with neurologists, radiologists, pharmacists, and other providers to develop stroke treatment protocols and rapid response capabilities.
  • Help develop a stroke team, and seek certification as a primary stroke center. The Joint Commission certifies stroke centers (www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms/PrimaryStroke Centers) based on demonstrated compliance with disease-based standards, effective use of clinical practice guidelines, and performance-improvement activities.
  • Establish a collaborative relationship with a regional stroke center or tertiary hospital. This could manifest as a telemedicine link to aid in stroke assessment and treatment decisions (see “Rural Response: The ‘Drip and Ship’ Method,” p. 28).
  • Refine approaches to more rapidly identify and work up patients who experience a stroke while they are in the hospital.

Hospitalists are going to continue to be out front on stroke management.

—S. Andrew Josephson, MD, director, neurohospitalist program, University of California at San Francisco Medical Center

Streamline In-Hospital Stroke Response

From 6.5% to 15% of stroke patients experience their stroke while they are in the hospital.4 “Hospitals are not always geared up to deal with neurological emergencies, and yet these patients are firmly within our domain,” Dr. Cumbler says. “We found that it took three times longer in our hospital to complete the evaluation when the stroke happened in the hospital than for strokes presenting in the emergency department.”

Through a hospitalwide quality-improvement (QI) project, UCD’s in-hospital stroke response time was reduced to 37 minutes from 70 minutes.

A comprehensive approach to stroke QI should include training first witnesses in the hospital (e.g., nurses, physical therapists, and housekeepers) to recognize potential stroke symptoms; creating a rapid response capability from personnel who understand how to evaluate and treat suspected stroke and are able to respond quickly; and making suspected stroke a top priority in the radiology lab.

Listen to Lee H. Schwann, MD, discuss the benefits of his telestroke center at Massachusetts General Hospital.

Stroke patient management processes need to be improved and provider roles better defined. Hospitalists can help on the frontlines, and should advocate for quality and patient safety measures.

“Stroke has so many facets: the need to reduce risk, to educate the public about the need for prompt response, the appropriate evaluation of risks and benefits of treatment,” Dr. Cumbler says. “How do you achieve a system in the hospital where patients are fully able to realize benefits of all these advances? I think there’s something in stroke treatment for every hospitalist and, for those with a particular interest, opportunities to play leadership roles.”

Rural Response: The “Drip and Ship” Method

For hospitals with limited access to neurologists, one emerging approach is to develop a collaborative relationship with a regional medical center, perhaps via a telemedicine link. With videoconferencing or phone consultations from stroke experts at the regional center, hospitalists at rural hospitals can initiate t-PA treatment within the critical window of opportunity recommended by the guidelines, then arrange for the patient’s transfer to the regional center for ongoing stroke management.

When a patient presents with stroke symptoms in the ED at Riverside Tappahannock Hospital in rural Tappahannock, Va., hospitalists call the stroke team at Medical College of Virginia in Richmond, about a 45-minute drive away. Typically, the stroke attending in Richmond directs hospitalists to either start thrombolytics following an established protocol, then transfer the patient to the Medical College of Virginia, or transport the patient without starting the treatment. If it’s too late for thrombolytics or a palliative approach is indicated, the patient could remain at Riverside.

Riverside hospitalist Laurie Lavery, MD, says the decision to start thrombolytics is one of the biggest challenges rural physicians face. “We actually don’t have a very formal process for stroke management here,” she explains. Initial assessment typically is done in the ED, and the patient might be transferred immediately to the tertiary center. In other cases, hospitalists assess whether t-PA is appropriate. “If we opt for starting t-PA … the patient is then shipped out, because we do not have the capability for managing complications or for close clinical monitoring,” Dr. Lavery says.—LB

 

 

New Era in Stroke Care

Many compare the evolution of stroke care to that of more common conditions, and hospitalists have a buffet of new and improved treatments and technologies at their disposal. “This is an interesting time in the treatment of stroke,” Dr. Cumbler says. “We are at the cusp of a new era. Previously, stroke was one of the classic neurologic issues in hospital medicine, but we did not have much to offer. Now, as with heart attack, we have a growing array of urgent and effective treatment options, and new imaging techniques to determine whether to treat and with what type of treatment.”

New and emerging treatment approaches include:

  • Induced hypothermia, to protect the brain;
  • Enhanced thrombolytics by ultrasound;
  • Perfusion-based treatment time windows;
  • Recanalization;
  • Extended cardiac telemetry targeting atrial fibrillation;
  • Neuroprotective agents; and
  • Pressor usage to raise blood pressure in the post-stroke patient.

Interventional strategies seek to combine intravenous t-PA with localized techniques to open occluded vessels. While these are cutting-edge and not yet integrated into medical routine, “they illustrate why stroke management is so exciting right now,” Dr. Cumbler says.

As stroke treatment becomes more standardized, hospitals will expect HM physicians to be thoroughly versed in optimal stroke care, says David Yu, MD, MBA, FACP, medical director of hospitalist services at Decatur Memorial Hospital in Illinois and a member of Team Hospitalist. “There will be a shift in hospital medicine, with the practice of neurology becoming more open to non-neurologists,” he says. “As opportunities for stroke treatment increase, more responsibility will fall on hospitalists. It is part of the evolution of our field.”

That evolution is reflected in Medicare’s decision in 2005 to begin paying hospitals a higher diagnostic-related grouping (DRG) rate for administering intravenous t-PA.5 DRG 559 pays a hospital about $6,000 more, regionally adjusted, for stroke treatment that includes intravenous t-PA, compared with stroke care without it. That differential creates incentives for the hospital to invest in infrastructure, staffing, and training.

The Neurohospitalist

Recent journal articles have explored the emergence of neurohospitalists—hybrid physicians who are loosely defined as neurologists whose primary focus is the care of hospitalized patients. The neurohospitalist trend is spurred by the same time and fiscal constraints that drove the HM movement, says William Freeman, MD, neurologist at the Mayo Clinic in Jacksonville, Fla., and coauthor of one of those articles.6

Office-based neurologists increasingly are unavailable to respond to neurological emergencies in the hospital. Depending on the size of the hospital and its need for specialist access, an organized neurohospitalist group covering a schedule in the hospital could make significant contributions to quality of care, length of stay, and other stroke outcomes, Dr. Freeman says. “This field is starting to gel and crystallize, as more neurologists find themselves focusing their practice on site of care,” he notes.

Although not all experts agree, Dr. Freeman says that general hospitalists could become neurohospitalists, and vice versa. Neurologists could learn more internal medicine, and the two groups could work together more closely, he says.

Dr. Josephson of the University of California at San Francisco Medical Center reserves the term “neurohospitalist” for neurologists, but adds that medical hospitalists can manage neurologic disorders. He also sees potential for joint research on the management of hospitalized neurologic patients.

Drs. Freeman and Josephson have led discussions of the neurohospitalist model, both within AAN and in a recent conference call with SHM representatives. Data are limited on the numbers of physicians practicing this specialty, but job postings are growing and a neurohospitalist listserv sponsored by AAN grew to 250 members from 50 within six months. The University of California at San Francisco Medical Center established the first neurohospitalist fellowship in 2008, and a neurohospitalist journal is in development. “Most stroke patients are not seen by neurologists. I keep saying that at stroke conventions,” Dr. Josephson explains. “Hospitalists are going to continue to be out front on stroke management. Some will have a neurologist available. More likely, the hospitalist and neurologist will be participating in acute stroke management as part of some system of care with the emergency department or critical care.” TH

 

 

Larry Beresford is a freelance writer based in Oakland, Calif.

Stroke Training Resources and Opportunities

American Stroke Association International Stroke Conference

Feb. 24-26, 2010

San Antonio, Texas

http://strokeconference.americanheart.org/portal/strokeconference/sc/

The Stroke Collaborative

Give Me Five For Stroke: Resources for Health Professionals

www.givemefiveforstroke.org/healthcare/professionalResources/

National Stroke Association

Stroke Educational Materials

http://www.stroke.org/site/DocServer/MaterialsOrderFrom.pdf?docID=841

The Neurology Channel: Your Neurology Community

Stroke information at www.neurologychannel.com/stroke/index.shtml

References

  1. Glasheen J, Cumbler E, Tailoring internal medicine training to improve hospitalist outcomes. Arch Intern Med. 2009;169:204-205.
  2. Telemedicine helps experts treat stroke from afar. National Stroke Association Web site. Available at: http://www.stroke.org/site/News2?page=NewsArticle&id=8208&news_iv_ctrl=1221. Accessed Nov. 4, 2009.
  3. Plauth WH, Pantilat SZ, Wachter RM, Fenton CL. Hospitalists’ perceptions of their residency training needs: results of a national survey. Am J Med. 2001;111(3)247-254.
  4. Blacker DJ. In-hospital stroke. Lancet Neurol. 2003;2(12):741-746.
  5. Demaerschalk BM, Durocher DL. How diagnosis-related group 559 will change the US Medicare cost reimbursement ratio for stroke centers. Stroke. 2007;38:1309-1312.
  6. Freeman WD, Gronseth G, Eidelman BH. Is it time for neurohospitalists? Neurology. 2009;72:476-477.
  7. Hacke W, Kaste M, Bluhmki E, et al. Thrombolysis with alteplase 3 to 4.5 hours after acute ischemic stroke. N Engl J Med. 2008;359(13):1317-1329.
  8. Del Zoppo GJ, Saver JL, Jauch EC, Adams HP Jr. American Heart Association Stroke Council. Expansion of the time window for treatment of acute ischemic stroke with intravenous tissue plasminogen activator: a science advisory from the American Heart Association/American Stroke Association. Stroke. 2009;40(8):2945-2948.
  9. Lyden P. Thrombolytic therapy for acute stroke—not a moment to lose. N Engl J Med. 2008;359:1393-1397.
  10. Doheny K. Few stroke patients get clot-busting drug. Business Week Web site. Available at: http://www.businessweek.com/lifestyle/content/healthday/624280.html. Accessed Sept. 23, 2009.
  11. Sacco RL, Diener HC, Yusuf S, et al. Aspirin and extended-release dipyridamole versus clopidogrel for recurrent strokes. N Engl J Med. 2008;359:1238-1251.
  12. Cumbler E, Glasheen J. Risk stratification tools for TIA: Which patients require hospital admission? J Hosp Med. 2009;4:247-251.
  13. Johnston SC, Rothwell PM, Nguyen-Huynh MN, et al. Validation and refinement of scores to predict very early stroke risk after transient ischaemic attack. Lancet. 2007; 369:283-292.
  14. Cumbler E, Glasheen J. Management of blood pressure after acute ischemic stroke: An evidence-based guide for the hospitalist. J Hosp Med. 2007;2:261-267.

Image Source: FORESTPATH/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

Stroke Management Issues for Hospitalists

The management of stroke is an emergency. That theory is best reflected in the maxim “time is brain,” says Jose Biller, MD, a neurologist at Loyola University Health System in Chicago. “Appropriate treatment begins with correct diagnosis,” he says. “Misdiagnoses of strokes are not uncommon but may have serious consequences.”

Eighty-seven percent of strokes are ischemic (a blood clot blocking a vessel in the brain). The other 13% are hemorrhagic strokes or subarachnoid hemorrhages. The distinction is critical, because IV t-PA is contraindicated when there is evidence of bleeding in the brain. For the most part, it’s tough to tell at first glance if a patient has suffered an ischemic or hemorrhagic stroke. A brain scan, typically a noncontrast computed tomography (CT) scan, is needed to rule out intracerebral hemorrhage.

IV t-PA can reverse the disabling effects of stroke if administered within a narrow therapeutic window of opportunity. National stroke treatment guidelines call for IV t-PA to be administered within three hours of the known onset of symptoms. The clock starts at the time the patient was last seen normal. Intravenous t-PA is not recommended outside the time window or for such contraindications as recent major surgery, stroke, or serious head trauma within the past 30 months, history of intracranial hemorrhage, seizures at onset of symptoms, or arterial puncture at a noncompressible site within seven days.

IV t-PA can have serious side effects, but it remains the gold standard of stroke treatment within the suggested time allotment. Recent research points toward widening the time window for IV t-PA from three hours to 4.5 hours. The multinational, double-blind European Cooperative Acute Stroke Study (ECASS III), published in the Sept. 25, 2008, issue of the New England Journal of Medicine, concluded that t-PA is still beneficial up to 4.5 hours after onset of symptoms, although “sooner is better and every minute counts.”7

This finding eventually will make its way into formal guidelines, Dr. Josephson says, and some hospitals already have adopted the 4.5-hour window for IV t-PA treatment.

In May 2008, an AHA/ASA advisory recommended that IV t-PA be provided up to 4.5 hours after known onset of a stroke, unless the patient is older than 80, takes oral anticoagulants, has an assessed National Stroke Scale score greater than 25, or presents a history of both stroke and diabetes.8 In those cases, AHA/ASA recommends sticking to the three-hour ceiling.

Patrick Lyden, MD, a neurologist at the University of California at San Diego School of Medicine, noted in a September 2008 New England Journal of Medicine editorial that thrombolytic therapy can restore neurological functions if given early enough, and “has stood the test of time, shown benefit in serial community registries on multiple continents, and received approval by every major regulatory authority in the world.”9

In fact, IV t-PA is such a powerful tool for reversing stroke’s effects that the bigger question is, why is it used only for an estimated 2% to 10% of stroke patients? According to data presented at an international stroke conference in February, 64% of U.S. hospitals had not provided any IV t-PA treatments within the prior two years.10 Researchers concluded that some patients get medical help too late, but some hospitals and physicians are uncomfortable administering t-PA, and others lack sufficient protocols for responding quickly with assessment and treatment.

Hospitalists need to understand the medical management of patients who do not qualify for t-PA, approaches which have their own time windows, Dr. Josephson says. Intra-arterial administration of the therapy is supported up to six hours after the onset of stroke, while mechanical embolectomy—physically removing the clot—is recommended for as many as eight hours after onset. Newer systems for performing mechanical embolectomies include the Merci Retrieval System and the Penumbra System.

Past eight hours, stroke treatment involves appropriate choice and intensity of anti-coagulant (heparin, warfarin) and antiplatelet treatments. According to the recent PRoFESS trial, the most common antiplatelet treatment choices, clopidogrel and dipyridamole with aspirin, were found to be equal in efficacy.11

Recognizing the patients who present in the ED with evidence of TIA is critical to treatment options; many are at high risk for a full-blown stroke within the next 48 hours and should be admitted for aggressive management.12 The ABCD Score has been shown to predict which recent TIA patients are at higher risk of stroke, and thus are in need of immediate evaluation to optimize stroke prevention.1,13 “The idea that TIA and stroke are different diseases is giving way,” Dr. Josephson says. “Conceptually, they are the same disorder.”

Other treatment issues include DVT prophylaxis, identifying potential sources of embolisms, and choice of echo exam. Managing blood pressure could include permissive hypertension as high as 220/120 immediately post-stroke in patients who did not receive t-PA, or 180/105 following t-PA, then returning the blood pressure back to normal in a slow and safe manner.14—LB

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Topics
Sections

Ethan Cumbler, MD, is board-certified in internal medicine and pediatrics, and has practiced hospital medicine for six years, first at a community hospital and now at the University of Colorado Denver (UCD), where he directs the Acute Care for the Elderly service. The prevalence of stroke in his practice and the daily challenges of managing stroke patients led Dr. Cumbler to seek additional training in stroke care. He is the hospitalist representative to the UCD stroke council, a researcher in the arena of acute stroke care, and is helping UCD become a Joint Commission-certified stroke center.

“There are a variety of roles for the hospitalist in stroke care,” Dr. Cumbler says, explaining that HM physicians can be admitting attendings for stroke patients or part of acute stroke teams, and participate in decisions to start such treatments as intravenous recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA), the Food and Drug Administration-approved clot-busting therapy. “[Hospitalists] can be medical consultants on stroke patients admitted to other hospital services, managing common comorbid conditions such as blood pressure and glucose levels, which have particular character for patients immediately post-stroke.”

Stroke is the third-leading cause of death in the U.S., as well as a leading cause of serious, long-term disability. How many stroke patients are seen by hospitalists is not known, but it is reasonable to assume that a majority of hospitalized stroke patients will encounter a hospitalist, if not for acute treatment, then for ongoing medical management.

Some hospitalists think stroke and transient ischemic attacks (TIAs)—temporary neurological deficits sometimes called “mini-strokes,” and a major risk factor for full-blown strokes—are among the most common diseases seen by hospitalists.1 Acute stroke care is a growing part of HM practice because neurologist availability in emergent situations varies widely between hospitals. The rapid evolution of stroke treatment and the time-sensitive needs of stroke patients represents a huge opportunity for hospitalists to fill that void for their hospitals—whether they want to or not.

“I think hospitalists are fully capable of learning and mastering stroke care, but it requires both interest and training,” Dr. Cumbler says.

Stroke Guidelines, Resources, and Training Options

HM Can Help Fill a Void

According to the American Heart Association (AHA), there are four neurologists per 100,000 Americans, and not all of those neurologists specialize in stroke care.2 The scarcity of neurological specialists means that in many hospitals, a neurologist won’t be available for the critical assessment and treatment decisions required in the first few hours after a stroke is diagnosed. Yet many hospitalists complain that their preparation during internal-medicine residency did not equip them to care for acute stroke patients.3

S. Andrew Josephson, MD, a neurovascular physician and director of the neurohospitalist program at the University of California at San Francisco Medical Center, says the number of hospitalists on the front lines of acute stroke care is growing every day. “A new stroke is a very treatable neurological emergency that requires ultra-fast intervention,”7 Dr. Josephson says, “and hospitalists, increasingly, are the people who matter most in that intervention.” The reason, in most cases, is hospitalists are available at all times, and neurologists aren’t.

 

 

Given variable access to neurologists at the time of urgent need in many hospitals, the actions hospitalists can take in acute stroke management include:

  • Become better trained in stroke care. Sessions on stroke management are included in numerous HM educational programs, including SHM conferences and in continuing medical education (CME) offerings from such groups as the American Academy of Neurology (see “Stroke Training, Resources, and Opportunities,” p. 30).
  • Partner with neurologists in your hospital. One trend is to develop a neurohospitalist practice.
  • Push for increased organization and response times for stroke patients. Given HM’s focus on quality and patient safety, hospitalists are natural champions for improving systems of care for stroke. Hospitalists can work with neurologists, radiologists, pharmacists, and other providers to develop stroke treatment protocols and rapid response capabilities.
  • Help develop a stroke team, and seek certification as a primary stroke center. The Joint Commission certifies stroke centers (www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms/PrimaryStroke Centers) based on demonstrated compliance with disease-based standards, effective use of clinical practice guidelines, and performance-improvement activities.
  • Establish a collaborative relationship with a regional stroke center or tertiary hospital. This could manifest as a telemedicine link to aid in stroke assessment and treatment decisions (see “Rural Response: The ‘Drip and Ship’ Method,” p. 28).
  • Refine approaches to more rapidly identify and work up patients who experience a stroke while they are in the hospital.

Hospitalists are going to continue to be out front on stroke management.

—S. Andrew Josephson, MD, director, neurohospitalist program, University of California at San Francisco Medical Center

Streamline In-Hospital Stroke Response

From 6.5% to 15% of stroke patients experience their stroke while they are in the hospital.4 “Hospitals are not always geared up to deal with neurological emergencies, and yet these patients are firmly within our domain,” Dr. Cumbler says. “We found that it took three times longer in our hospital to complete the evaluation when the stroke happened in the hospital than for strokes presenting in the emergency department.”

Through a hospitalwide quality-improvement (QI) project, UCD’s in-hospital stroke response time was reduced to 37 minutes from 70 minutes.

A comprehensive approach to stroke QI should include training first witnesses in the hospital (e.g., nurses, physical therapists, and housekeepers) to recognize potential stroke symptoms; creating a rapid response capability from personnel who understand how to evaluate and treat suspected stroke and are able to respond quickly; and making suspected stroke a top priority in the radiology lab.

Listen to Lee H. Schwann, MD, discuss the benefits of his telestroke center at Massachusetts General Hospital.

Stroke patient management processes need to be improved and provider roles better defined. Hospitalists can help on the frontlines, and should advocate for quality and patient safety measures.

“Stroke has so many facets: the need to reduce risk, to educate the public about the need for prompt response, the appropriate evaluation of risks and benefits of treatment,” Dr. Cumbler says. “How do you achieve a system in the hospital where patients are fully able to realize benefits of all these advances? I think there’s something in stroke treatment for every hospitalist and, for those with a particular interest, opportunities to play leadership roles.”

Rural Response: The “Drip and Ship” Method

For hospitals with limited access to neurologists, one emerging approach is to develop a collaborative relationship with a regional medical center, perhaps via a telemedicine link. With videoconferencing or phone consultations from stroke experts at the regional center, hospitalists at rural hospitals can initiate t-PA treatment within the critical window of opportunity recommended by the guidelines, then arrange for the patient’s transfer to the regional center for ongoing stroke management.

When a patient presents with stroke symptoms in the ED at Riverside Tappahannock Hospital in rural Tappahannock, Va., hospitalists call the stroke team at Medical College of Virginia in Richmond, about a 45-minute drive away. Typically, the stroke attending in Richmond directs hospitalists to either start thrombolytics following an established protocol, then transfer the patient to the Medical College of Virginia, or transport the patient without starting the treatment. If it’s too late for thrombolytics or a palliative approach is indicated, the patient could remain at Riverside.

Riverside hospitalist Laurie Lavery, MD, says the decision to start thrombolytics is one of the biggest challenges rural physicians face. “We actually don’t have a very formal process for stroke management here,” she explains. Initial assessment typically is done in the ED, and the patient might be transferred immediately to the tertiary center. In other cases, hospitalists assess whether t-PA is appropriate. “If we opt for starting t-PA … the patient is then shipped out, because we do not have the capability for managing complications or for close clinical monitoring,” Dr. Lavery says.—LB

 

 

New Era in Stroke Care

Many compare the evolution of stroke care to that of more common conditions, and hospitalists have a buffet of new and improved treatments and technologies at their disposal. “This is an interesting time in the treatment of stroke,” Dr. Cumbler says. “We are at the cusp of a new era. Previously, stroke was one of the classic neurologic issues in hospital medicine, but we did not have much to offer. Now, as with heart attack, we have a growing array of urgent and effective treatment options, and new imaging techniques to determine whether to treat and with what type of treatment.”

New and emerging treatment approaches include:

  • Induced hypothermia, to protect the brain;
  • Enhanced thrombolytics by ultrasound;
  • Perfusion-based treatment time windows;
  • Recanalization;
  • Extended cardiac telemetry targeting atrial fibrillation;
  • Neuroprotective agents; and
  • Pressor usage to raise blood pressure in the post-stroke patient.

Interventional strategies seek to combine intravenous t-PA with localized techniques to open occluded vessels. While these are cutting-edge and not yet integrated into medical routine, “they illustrate why stroke management is so exciting right now,” Dr. Cumbler says.

As stroke treatment becomes more standardized, hospitals will expect HM physicians to be thoroughly versed in optimal stroke care, says David Yu, MD, MBA, FACP, medical director of hospitalist services at Decatur Memorial Hospital in Illinois and a member of Team Hospitalist. “There will be a shift in hospital medicine, with the practice of neurology becoming more open to non-neurologists,” he says. “As opportunities for stroke treatment increase, more responsibility will fall on hospitalists. It is part of the evolution of our field.”

That evolution is reflected in Medicare’s decision in 2005 to begin paying hospitals a higher diagnostic-related grouping (DRG) rate for administering intravenous t-PA.5 DRG 559 pays a hospital about $6,000 more, regionally adjusted, for stroke treatment that includes intravenous t-PA, compared with stroke care without it. That differential creates incentives for the hospital to invest in infrastructure, staffing, and training.

The Neurohospitalist

Recent journal articles have explored the emergence of neurohospitalists—hybrid physicians who are loosely defined as neurologists whose primary focus is the care of hospitalized patients. The neurohospitalist trend is spurred by the same time and fiscal constraints that drove the HM movement, says William Freeman, MD, neurologist at the Mayo Clinic in Jacksonville, Fla., and coauthor of one of those articles.6

Office-based neurologists increasingly are unavailable to respond to neurological emergencies in the hospital. Depending on the size of the hospital and its need for specialist access, an organized neurohospitalist group covering a schedule in the hospital could make significant contributions to quality of care, length of stay, and other stroke outcomes, Dr. Freeman says. “This field is starting to gel and crystallize, as more neurologists find themselves focusing their practice on site of care,” he notes.

Although not all experts agree, Dr. Freeman says that general hospitalists could become neurohospitalists, and vice versa. Neurologists could learn more internal medicine, and the two groups could work together more closely, he says.

Dr. Josephson of the University of California at San Francisco Medical Center reserves the term “neurohospitalist” for neurologists, but adds that medical hospitalists can manage neurologic disorders. He also sees potential for joint research on the management of hospitalized neurologic patients.

Drs. Freeman and Josephson have led discussions of the neurohospitalist model, both within AAN and in a recent conference call with SHM representatives. Data are limited on the numbers of physicians practicing this specialty, but job postings are growing and a neurohospitalist listserv sponsored by AAN grew to 250 members from 50 within six months. The University of California at San Francisco Medical Center established the first neurohospitalist fellowship in 2008, and a neurohospitalist journal is in development. “Most stroke patients are not seen by neurologists. I keep saying that at stroke conventions,” Dr. Josephson explains. “Hospitalists are going to continue to be out front on stroke management. Some will have a neurologist available. More likely, the hospitalist and neurologist will be participating in acute stroke management as part of some system of care with the emergency department or critical care.” TH

 

 

Larry Beresford is a freelance writer based in Oakland, Calif.

Stroke Training Resources and Opportunities

American Stroke Association International Stroke Conference

Feb. 24-26, 2010

San Antonio, Texas

http://strokeconference.americanheart.org/portal/strokeconference/sc/

The Stroke Collaborative

Give Me Five For Stroke: Resources for Health Professionals

www.givemefiveforstroke.org/healthcare/professionalResources/

National Stroke Association

Stroke Educational Materials

http://www.stroke.org/site/DocServer/MaterialsOrderFrom.pdf?docID=841

The Neurology Channel: Your Neurology Community

Stroke information at www.neurologychannel.com/stroke/index.shtml

References

  1. Glasheen J, Cumbler E, Tailoring internal medicine training to improve hospitalist outcomes. Arch Intern Med. 2009;169:204-205.
  2. Telemedicine helps experts treat stroke from afar. National Stroke Association Web site. Available at: http://www.stroke.org/site/News2?page=NewsArticle&id=8208&news_iv_ctrl=1221. Accessed Nov. 4, 2009.
  3. Plauth WH, Pantilat SZ, Wachter RM, Fenton CL. Hospitalists’ perceptions of their residency training needs: results of a national survey. Am J Med. 2001;111(3)247-254.
  4. Blacker DJ. In-hospital stroke. Lancet Neurol. 2003;2(12):741-746.
  5. Demaerschalk BM, Durocher DL. How diagnosis-related group 559 will change the US Medicare cost reimbursement ratio for stroke centers. Stroke. 2007;38:1309-1312.
  6. Freeman WD, Gronseth G, Eidelman BH. Is it time for neurohospitalists? Neurology. 2009;72:476-477.
  7. Hacke W, Kaste M, Bluhmki E, et al. Thrombolysis with alteplase 3 to 4.5 hours after acute ischemic stroke. N Engl J Med. 2008;359(13):1317-1329.
  8. Del Zoppo GJ, Saver JL, Jauch EC, Adams HP Jr. American Heart Association Stroke Council. Expansion of the time window for treatment of acute ischemic stroke with intravenous tissue plasminogen activator: a science advisory from the American Heart Association/American Stroke Association. Stroke. 2009;40(8):2945-2948.
  9. Lyden P. Thrombolytic therapy for acute stroke—not a moment to lose. N Engl J Med. 2008;359:1393-1397.
  10. Doheny K. Few stroke patients get clot-busting drug. Business Week Web site. Available at: http://www.businessweek.com/lifestyle/content/healthday/624280.html. Accessed Sept. 23, 2009.
  11. Sacco RL, Diener HC, Yusuf S, et al. Aspirin and extended-release dipyridamole versus clopidogrel for recurrent strokes. N Engl J Med. 2008;359:1238-1251.
  12. Cumbler E, Glasheen J. Risk stratification tools for TIA: Which patients require hospital admission? J Hosp Med. 2009;4:247-251.
  13. Johnston SC, Rothwell PM, Nguyen-Huynh MN, et al. Validation and refinement of scores to predict very early stroke risk after transient ischaemic attack. Lancet. 2007; 369:283-292.
  14. Cumbler E, Glasheen J. Management of blood pressure after acute ischemic stroke: An evidence-based guide for the hospitalist. J Hosp Med. 2007;2:261-267.

Image Source: FORESTPATH/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

Stroke Management Issues for Hospitalists

The management of stroke is an emergency. That theory is best reflected in the maxim “time is brain,” says Jose Biller, MD, a neurologist at Loyola University Health System in Chicago. “Appropriate treatment begins with correct diagnosis,” he says. “Misdiagnoses of strokes are not uncommon but may have serious consequences.”

Eighty-seven percent of strokes are ischemic (a blood clot blocking a vessel in the brain). The other 13% are hemorrhagic strokes or subarachnoid hemorrhages. The distinction is critical, because IV t-PA is contraindicated when there is evidence of bleeding in the brain. For the most part, it’s tough to tell at first glance if a patient has suffered an ischemic or hemorrhagic stroke. A brain scan, typically a noncontrast computed tomography (CT) scan, is needed to rule out intracerebral hemorrhage.

IV t-PA can reverse the disabling effects of stroke if administered within a narrow therapeutic window of opportunity. National stroke treatment guidelines call for IV t-PA to be administered within three hours of the known onset of symptoms. The clock starts at the time the patient was last seen normal. Intravenous t-PA is not recommended outside the time window or for such contraindications as recent major surgery, stroke, or serious head trauma within the past 30 months, history of intracranial hemorrhage, seizures at onset of symptoms, or arterial puncture at a noncompressible site within seven days.

IV t-PA can have serious side effects, but it remains the gold standard of stroke treatment within the suggested time allotment. Recent research points toward widening the time window for IV t-PA from three hours to 4.5 hours. The multinational, double-blind European Cooperative Acute Stroke Study (ECASS III), published in the Sept. 25, 2008, issue of the New England Journal of Medicine, concluded that t-PA is still beneficial up to 4.5 hours after onset of symptoms, although “sooner is better and every minute counts.”7

This finding eventually will make its way into formal guidelines, Dr. Josephson says, and some hospitals already have adopted the 4.5-hour window for IV t-PA treatment.

In May 2008, an AHA/ASA advisory recommended that IV t-PA be provided up to 4.5 hours after known onset of a stroke, unless the patient is older than 80, takes oral anticoagulants, has an assessed National Stroke Scale score greater than 25, or presents a history of both stroke and diabetes.8 In those cases, AHA/ASA recommends sticking to the three-hour ceiling.

Patrick Lyden, MD, a neurologist at the University of California at San Diego School of Medicine, noted in a September 2008 New England Journal of Medicine editorial that thrombolytic therapy can restore neurological functions if given early enough, and “has stood the test of time, shown benefit in serial community registries on multiple continents, and received approval by every major regulatory authority in the world.”9

In fact, IV t-PA is such a powerful tool for reversing stroke’s effects that the bigger question is, why is it used only for an estimated 2% to 10% of stroke patients? According to data presented at an international stroke conference in February, 64% of U.S. hospitals had not provided any IV t-PA treatments within the prior two years.10 Researchers concluded that some patients get medical help too late, but some hospitals and physicians are uncomfortable administering t-PA, and others lack sufficient protocols for responding quickly with assessment and treatment.

Hospitalists need to understand the medical management of patients who do not qualify for t-PA, approaches which have their own time windows, Dr. Josephson says. Intra-arterial administration of the therapy is supported up to six hours after the onset of stroke, while mechanical embolectomy—physically removing the clot—is recommended for as many as eight hours after onset. Newer systems for performing mechanical embolectomies include the Merci Retrieval System and the Penumbra System.

Past eight hours, stroke treatment involves appropriate choice and intensity of anti-coagulant (heparin, warfarin) and antiplatelet treatments. According to the recent PRoFESS trial, the most common antiplatelet treatment choices, clopidogrel and dipyridamole with aspirin, were found to be equal in efficacy.11

Recognizing the patients who present in the ED with evidence of TIA is critical to treatment options; many are at high risk for a full-blown stroke within the next 48 hours and should be admitted for aggressive management.12 The ABCD Score has been shown to predict which recent TIA patients are at higher risk of stroke, and thus are in need of immediate evaluation to optimize stroke prevention.1,13 “The idea that TIA and stroke are different diseases is giving way,” Dr. Josephson says. “Conceptually, they are the same disorder.”

Other treatment issues include DVT prophylaxis, identifying potential sources of embolisms, and choice of echo exam. Managing blood pressure could include permissive hypertension as high as 220/120 immediately post-stroke in patients who did not receive t-PA, or 180/105 following t-PA, then returning the blood pressure back to normal in a slow and safe manner.14—LB

Ethan Cumbler, MD, is board-certified in internal medicine and pediatrics, and has practiced hospital medicine for six years, first at a community hospital and now at the University of Colorado Denver (UCD), where he directs the Acute Care for the Elderly service. The prevalence of stroke in his practice and the daily challenges of managing stroke patients led Dr. Cumbler to seek additional training in stroke care. He is the hospitalist representative to the UCD stroke council, a researcher in the arena of acute stroke care, and is helping UCD become a Joint Commission-certified stroke center.

“There are a variety of roles for the hospitalist in stroke care,” Dr. Cumbler says, explaining that HM physicians can be admitting attendings for stroke patients or part of acute stroke teams, and participate in decisions to start such treatments as intravenous recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA), the Food and Drug Administration-approved clot-busting therapy. “[Hospitalists] can be medical consultants on stroke patients admitted to other hospital services, managing common comorbid conditions such as blood pressure and glucose levels, which have particular character for patients immediately post-stroke.”

Stroke is the third-leading cause of death in the U.S., as well as a leading cause of serious, long-term disability. How many stroke patients are seen by hospitalists is not known, but it is reasonable to assume that a majority of hospitalized stroke patients will encounter a hospitalist, if not for acute treatment, then for ongoing medical management.

Some hospitalists think stroke and transient ischemic attacks (TIAs)—temporary neurological deficits sometimes called “mini-strokes,” and a major risk factor for full-blown strokes—are among the most common diseases seen by hospitalists.1 Acute stroke care is a growing part of HM practice because neurologist availability in emergent situations varies widely between hospitals. The rapid evolution of stroke treatment and the time-sensitive needs of stroke patients represents a huge opportunity for hospitalists to fill that void for their hospitals—whether they want to or not.

“I think hospitalists are fully capable of learning and mastering stroke care, but it requires both interest and training,” Dr. Cumbler says.

Stroke Guidelines, Resources, and Training Options

HM Can Help Fill a Void

According to the American Heart Association (AHA), there are four neurologists per 100,000 Americans, and not all of those neurologists specialize in stroke care.2 The scarcity of neurological specialists means that in many hospitals, a neurologist won’t be available for the critical assessment and treatment decisions required in the first few hours after a stroke is diagnosed. Yet many hospitalists complain that their preparation during internal-medicine residency did not equip them to care for acute stroke patients.3

S. Andrew Josephson, MD, a neurovascular physician and director of the neurohospitalist program at the University of California at San Francisco Medical Center, says the number of hospitalists on the front lines of acute stroke care is growing every day. “A new stroke is a very treatable neurological emergency that requires ultra-fast intervention,”7 Dr. Josephson says, “and hospitalists, increasingly, are the people who matter most in that intervention.” The reason, in most cases, is hospitalists are available at all times, and neurologists aren’t.

 

 

Given variable access to neurologists at the time of urgent need in many hospitals, the actions hospitalists can take in acute stroke management include:

  • Become better trained in stroke care. Sessions on stroke management are included in numerous HM educational programs, including SHM conferences and in continuing medical education (CME) offerings from such groups as the American Academy of Neurology (see “Stroke Training, Resources, and Opportunities,” p. 30).
  • Partner with neurologists in your hospital. One trend is to develop a neurohospitalist practice.
  • Push for increased organization and response times for stroke patients. Given HM’s focus on quality and patient safety, hospitalists are natural champions for improving systems of care for stroke. Hospitalists can work with neurologists, radiologists, pharmacists, and other providers to develop stroke treatment protocols and rapid response capabilities.
  • Help develop a stroke team, and seek certification as a primary stroke center. The Joint Commission certifies stroke centers (www.jointcommission.org/CertificationPrograms/PrimaryStroke Centers) based on demonstrated compliance with disease-based standards, effective use of clinical practice guidelines, and performance-improvement activities.
  • Establish a collaborative relationship with a regional stroke center or tertiary hospital. This could manifest as a telemedicine link to aid in stroke assessment and treatment decisions (see “Rural Response: The ‘Drip and Ship’ Method,” p. 28).
  • Refine approaches to more rapidly identify and work up patients who experience a stroke while they are in the hospital.

Hospitalists are going to continue to be out front on stroke management.

—S. Andrew Josephson, MD, director, neurohospitalist program, University of California at San Francisco Medical Center

Streamline In-Hospital Stroke Response

From 6.5% to 15% of stroke patients experience their stroke while they are in the hospital.4 “Hospitals are not always geared up to deal with neurological emergencies, and yet these patients are firmly within our domain,” Dr. Cumbler says. “We found that it took three times longer in our hospital to complete the evaluation when the stroke happened in the hospital than for strokes presenting in the emergency department.”

Through a hospitalwide quality-improvement (QI) project, UCD’s in-hospital stroke response time was reduced to 37 minutes from 70 minutes.

A comprehensive approach to stroke QI should include training first witnesses in the hospital (e.g., nurses, physical therapists, and housekeepers) to recognize potential stroke symptoms; creating a rapid response capability from personnel who understand how to evaluate and treat suspected stroke and are able to respond quickly; and making suspected stroke a top priority in the radiology lab.

Listen to Lee H. Schwann, MD, discuss the benefits of his telestroke center at Massachusetts General Hospital.

Stroke patient management processes need to be improved and provider roles better defined. Hospitalists can help on the frontlines, and should advocate for quality and patient safety measures.

“Stroke has so many facets: the need to reduce risk, to educate the public about the need for prompt response, the appropriate evaluation of risks and benefits of treatment,” Dr. Cumbler says. “How do you achieve a system in the hospital where patients are fully able to realize benefits of all these advances? I think there’s something in stroke treatment for every hospitalist and, for those with a particular interest, opportunities to play leadership roles.”

Rural Response: The “Drip and Ship” Method

For hospitals with limited access to neurologists, one emerging approach is to develop a collaborative relationship with a regional medical center, perhaps via a telemedicine link. With videoconferencing or phone consultations from stroke experts at the regional center, hospitalists at rural hospitals can initiate t-PA treatment within the critical window of opportunity recommended by the guidelines, then arrange for the patient’s transfer to the regional center for ongoing stroke management.

When a patient presents with stroke symptoms in the ED at Riverside Tappahannock Hospital in rural Tappahannock, Va., hospitalists call the stroke team at Medical College of Virginia in Richmond, about a 45-minute drive away. Typically, the stroke attending in Richmond directs hospitalists to either start thrombolytics following an established protocol, then transfer the patient to the Medical College of Virginia, or transport the patient without starting the treatment. If it’s too late for thrombolytics or a palliative approach is indicated, the patient could remain at Riverside.

Riverside hospitalist Laurie Lavery, MD, says the decision to start thrombolytics is one of the biggest challenges rural physicians face. “We actually don’t have a very formal process for stroke management here,” she explains. Initial assessment typically is done in the ED, and the patient might be transferred immediately to the tertiary center. In other cases, hospitalists assess whether t-PA is appropriate. “If we opt for starting t-PA … the patient is then shipped out, because we do not have the capability for managing complications or for close clinical monitoring,” Dr. Lavery says.—LB

 

 

New Era in Stroke Care

Many compare the evolution of stroke care to that of more common conditions, and hospitalists have a buffet of new and improved treatments and technologies at their disposal. “This is an interesting time in the treatment of stroke,” Dr. Cumbler says. “We are at the cusp of a new era. Previously, stroke was one of the classic neurologic issues in hospital medicine, but we did not have much to offer. Now, as with heart attack, we have a growing array of urgent and effective treatment options, and new imaging techniques to determine whether to treat and with what type of treatment.”

New and emerging treatment approaches include:

  • Induced hypothermia, to protect the brain;
  • Enhanced thrombolytics by ultrasound;
  • Perfusion-based treatment time windows;
  • Recanalization;
  • Extended cardiac telemetry targeting atrial fibrillation;
  • Neuroprotective agents; and
  • Pressor usage to raise blood pressure in the post-stroke patient.

Interventional strategies seek to combine intravenous t-PA with localized techniques to open occluded vessels. While these are cutting-edge and not yet integrated into medical routine, “they illustrate why stroke management is so exciting right now,” Dr. Cumbler says.

As stroke treatment becomes more standardized, hospitals will expect HM physicians to be thoroughly versed in optimal stroke care, says David Yu, MD, MBA, FACP, medical director of hospitalist services at Decatur Memorial Hospital in Illinois and a member of Team Hospitalist. “There will be a shift in hospital medicine, with the practice of neurology becoming more open to non-neurologists,” he says. “As opportunities for stroke treatment increase, more responsibility will fall on hospitalists. It is part of the evolution of our field.”

That evolution is reflected in Medicare’s decision in 2005 to begin paying hospitals a higher diagnostic-related grouping (DRG) rate for administering intravenous t-PA.5 DRG 559 pays a hospital about $6,000 more, regionally adjusted, for stroke treatment that includes intravenous t-PA, compared with stroke care without it. That differential creates incentives for the hospital to invest in infrastructure, staffing, and training.

The Neurohospitalist

Recent journal articles have explored the emergence of neurohospitalists—hybrid physicians who are loosely defined as neurologists whose primary focus is the care of hospitalized patients. The neurohospitalist trend is spurred by the same time and fiscal constraints that drove the HM movement, says William Freeman, MD, neurologist at the Mayo Clinic in Jacksonville, Fla., and coauthor of one of those articles.6

Office-based neurologists increasingly are unavailable to respond to neurological emergencies in the hospital. Depending on the size of the hospital and its need for specialist access, an organized neurohospitalist group covering a schedule in the hospital could make significant contributions to quality of care, length of stay, and other stroke outcomes, Dr. Freeman says. “This field is starting to gel and crystallize, as more neurologists find themselves focusing their practice on site of care,” he notes.

Although not all experts agree, Dr. Freeman says that general hospitalists could become neurohospitalists, and vice versa. Neurologists could learn more internal medicine, and the two groups could work together more closely, he says.

Dr. Josephson of the University of California at San Francisco Medical Center reserves the term “neurohospitalist” for neurologists, but adds that medical hospitalists can manage neurologic disorders. He also sees potential for joint research on the management of hospitalized neurologic patients.

Drs. Freeman and Josephson have led discussions of the neurohospitalist model, both within AAN and in a recent conference call with SHM representatives. Data are limited on the numbers of physicians practicing this specialty, but job postings are growing and a neurohospitalist listserv sponsored by AAN grew to 250 members from 50 within six months. The University of California at San Francisco Medical Center established the first neurohospitalist fellowship in 2008, and a neurohospitalist journal is in development. “Most stroke patients are not seen by neurologists. I keep saying that at stroke conventions,” Dr. Josephson explains. “Hospitalists are going to continue to be out front on stroke management. Some will have a neurologist available. More likely, the hospitalist and neurologist will be participating in acute stroke management as part of some system of care with the emergency department or critical care.” TH

 

 

Larry Beresford is a freelance writer based in Oakland, Calif.

Stroke Training Resources and Opportunities

American Stroke Association International Stroke Conference

Feb. 24-26, 2010

San Antonio, Texas

http://strokeconference.americanheart.org/portal/strokeconference/sc/

The Stroke Collaborative

Give Me Five For Stroke: Resources for Health Professionals

www.givemefiveforstroke.org/healthcare/professionalResources/

National Stroke Association

Stroke Educational Materials

http://www.stroke.org/site/DocServer/MaterialsOrderFrom.pdf?docID=841

The Neurology Channel: Your Neurology Community

Stroke information at www.neurologychannel.com/stroke/index.shtml

References

  1. Glasheen J, Cumbler E, Tailoring internal medicine training to improve hospitalist outcomes. Arch Intern Med. 2009;169:204-205.
  2. Telemedicine helps experts treat stroke from afar. National Stroke Association Web site. Available at: http://www.stroke.org/site/News2?page=NewsArticle&id=8208&news_iv_ctrl=1221. Accessed Nov. 4, 2009.
  3. Plauth WH, Pantilat SZ, Wachter RM, Fenton CL. Hospitalists’ perceptions of their residency training needs: results of a national survey. Am J Med. 2001;111(3)247-254.
  4. Blacker DJ. In-hospital stroke. Lancet Neurol. 2003;2(12):741-746.
  5. Demaerschalk BM, Durocher DL. How diagnosis-related group 559 will change the US Medicare cost reimbursement ratio for stroke centers. Stroke. 2007;38:1309-1312.
  6. Freeman WD, Gronseth G, Eidelman BH. Is it time for neurohospitalists? Neurology. 2009;72:476-477.
  7. Hacke W, Kaste M, Bluhmki E, et al. Thrombolysis with alteplase 3 to 4.5 hours after acute ischemic stroke. N Engl J Med. 2008;359(13):1317-1329.
  8. Del Zoppo GJ, Saver JL, Jauch EC, Adams HP Jr. American Heart Association Stroke Council. Expansion of the time window for treatment of acute ischemic stroke with intravenous tissue plasminogen activator: a science advisory from the American Heart Association/American Stroke Association. Stroke. 2009;40(8):2945-2948.
  9. Lyden P. Thrombolytic therapy for acute stroke—not a moment to lose. N Engl J Med. 2008;359:1393-1397.
  10. Doheny K. Few stroke patients get clot-busting drug. Business Week Web site. Available at: http://www.businessweek.com/lifestyle/content/healthday/624280.html. Accessed Sept. 23, 2009.
  11. Sacco RL, Diener HC, Yusuf S, et al. Aspirin and extended-release dipyridamole versus clopidogrel for recurrent strokes. N Engl J Med. 2008;359:1238-1251.
  12. Cumbler E, Glasheen J. Risk stratification tools for TIA: Which patients require hospital admission? J Hosp Med. 2009;4:247-251.
  13. Johnston SC, Rothwell PM, Nguyen-Huynh MN, et al. Validation and refinement of scores to predict very early stroke risk after transient ischaemic attack. Lancet. 2007; 369:283-292.
  14. Cumbler E, Glasheen J. Management of blood pressure after acute ischemic stroke: An evidence-based guide for the hospitalist. J Hosp Med. 2007;2:261-267.

Image Source: FORESTPATH/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

Stroke Management Issues for Hospitalists

The management of stroke is an emergency. That theory is best reflected in the maxim “time is brain,” says Jose Biller, MD, a neurologist at Loyola University Health System in Chicago. “Appropriate treatment begins with correct diagnosis,” he says. “Misdiagnoses of strokes are not uncommon but may have serious consequences.”

Eighty-seven percent of strokes are ischemic (a blood clot blocking a vessel in the brain). The other 13% are hemorrhagic strokes or subarachnoid hemorrhages. The distinction is critical, because IV t-PA is contraindicated when there is evidence of bleeding in the brain. For the most part, it’s tough to tell at first glance if a patient has suffered an ischemic or hemorrhagic stroke. A brain scan, typically a noncontrast computed tomography (CT) scan, is needed to rule out intracerebral hemorrhage.

IV t-PA can reverse the disabling effects of stroke if administered within a narrow therapeutic window of opportunity. National stroke treatment guidelines call for IV t-PA to be administered within three hours of the known onset of symptoms. The clock starts at the time the patient was last seen normal. Intravenous t-PA is not recommended outside the time window or for such contraindications as recent major surgery, stroke, or serious head trauma within the past 30 months, history of intracranial hemorrhage, seizures at onset of symptoms, or arterial puncture at a noncompressible site within seven days.

IV t-PA can have serious side effects, but it remains the gold standard of stroke treatment within the suggested time allotment. Recent research points toward widening the time window for IV t-PA from three hours to 4.5 hours. The multinational, double-blind European Cooperative Acute Stroke Study (ECASS III), published in the Sept. 25, 2008, issue of the New England Journal of Medicine, concluded that t-PA is still beneficial up to 4.5 hours after onset of symptoms, although “sooner is better and every minute counts.”7

This finding eventually will make its way into formal guidelines, Dr. Josephson says, and some hospitals already have adopted the 4.5-hour window for IV t-PA treatment.

In May 2008, an AHA/ASA advisory recommended that IV t-PA be provided up to 4.5 hours after known onset of a stroke, unless the patient is older than 80, takes oral anticoagulants, has an assessed National Stroke Scale score greater than 25, or presents a history of both stroke and diabetes.8 In those cases, AHA/ASA recommends sticking to the three-hour ceiling.

Patrick Lyden, MD, a neurologist at the University of California at San Diego School of Medicine, noted in a September 2008 New England Journal of Medicine editorial that thrombolytic therapy can restore neurological functions if given early enough, and “has stood the test of time, shown benefit in serial community registries on multiple continents, and received approval by every major regulatory authority in the world.”9

In fact, IV t-PA is such a powerful tool for reversing stroke’s effects that the bigger question is, why is it used only for an estimated 2% to 10% of stroke patients? According to data presented at an international stroke conference in February, 64% of U.S. hospitals had not provided any IV t-PA treatments within the prior two years.10 Researchers concluded that some patients get medical help too late, but some hospitals and physicians are uncomfortable administering t-PA, and others lack sufficient protocols for responding quickly with assessment and treatment.

Hospitalists need to understand the medical management of patients who do not qualify for t-PA, approaches which have their own time windows, Dr. Josephson says. Intra-arterial administration of the therapy is supported up to six hours after the onset of stroke, while mechanical embolectomy—physically removing the clot—is recommended for as many as eight hours after onset. Newer systems for performing mechanical embolectomies include the Merci Retrieval System and the Penumbra System.

Past eight hours, stroke treatment involves appropriate choice and intensity of anti-coagulant (heparin, warfarin) and antiplatelet treatments. According to the recent PRoFESS trial, the most common antiplatelet treatment choices, clopidogrel and dipyridamole with aspirin, were found to be equal in efficacy.11

Recognizing the patients who present in the ED with evidence of TIA is critical to treatment options; many are at high risk for a full-blown stroke within the next 48 hours and should be admitted for aggressive management.12 The ABCD Score has been shown to predict which recent TIA patients are at higher risk of stroke, and thus are in need of immediate evaluation to optimize stroke prevention.1,13 “The idea that TIA and stroke are different diseases is giving way,” Dr. Josephson says. “Conceptually, they are the same disorder.”

Other treatment issues include DVT prophylaxis, identifying potential sources of embolisms, and choice of echo exam. Managing blood pressure could include permissive hypertension as high as 220/120 immediately post-stroke in patients who did not receive t-PA, or 180/105 following t-PA, then returning the blood pressure back to normal in a slow and safe manner.14—LB

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Spotlight on Stroke
Display Headline
Spotlight on Stroke
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Robert Wachter, MD, FHM

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:32
Display Headline
ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Robert Wachter, MD, FHM

Listen to HM pioneer Bob Wachter recap his HM09 keynote address about the quality and patient safety revolution

Audio / Podcast
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Sections
Audio / Podcast
Audio / Podcast

Listen to HM pioneer Bob Wachter recap his HM09 keynote address about the quality and patient safety revolution

Listen to HM pioneer Bob Wachter recap his HM09 keynote address about the quality and patient safety revolution

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Robert Wachter, MD, FHM
Display Headline
ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Robert Wachter, MD, FHM
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

All Grown Up

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:32
Display Headline
All Grown Up

There are times when Dan Hale, MD, FAAP, wishes he had more standardized tools to use when he leads a team of four full-time and four part-time pediatric hospitalists at Central Maine Medical Center (CMMC) in Lewiston. Even after five years at the community hospital, the pediatric HM program still is searching for the best way to hand off patients who are leaving the hospital to their primary-care physicians (PCPs).

It also would be beneficial to have markers against which CMMC could compare itself with similarly sized pediatric HM programs around the country, says Dr. Hale, chief of pediatrics at the medical center. CMMC, which averages about 4,000 patient encounters per year, is one of three hospitals in the state with a pediatric HM program. “It would be nice to see progress being made in these areas,” he says.

Dr. Hale might not have to wait long to see his wishes granted. More than 20 pediatric hospitalists from across the nation met in Chicago earlier this year, intent on developing a strategic framework for pediatric HM (PHM). About 10% of the 30,000-plus hospitalists practicing in the U.S. focus exclusively on pediatrics, according to SHM’s 2007-2008 “Bi-Annual Survey on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement.” Like the hospitalist movement in general, PHM is growing in number and influence as pediatric hospitalists take on leadership roles and develop working relationships with hospital administrators. The time has come to clearly define the discipline for other physicians, as well as patients and their families, and leverage PHM’s growth and usefulness to improve medical care for children, says Erin Stucky, MD, FHM, a pediatric hospitalist at Rady Children’s Hospital and Health Center in San Diego.

With this dashboard, we want to be able to say, “Here are the things you should look at to ensure quality care for your kids, and as you look at them, you should probably track them over time.”

—Jennifer Daru, MD, FAAP, FHM, chief, division of pediatric hospital medicine, California Pacific Medical Center, San Francisco

“It’s a little bit of pie in the sky, a little bit of rose-colored glasses, but it’s good to aim high,” she says.

Some PHM leaders think the subspecialty has advanced enough in recent years to apply its collective knowledge and influence on a broader stage. “We have gone through our adolescence, and now we are a big community,” says Jack Percelay, MD, MPH, FHM, a pediatric hospitalist at Saint Barnabas Medical Center in New York City and SHM board member. “We’re active at almost all the major medical centers and we need to step up to the plate. We need to start the hard work of bringing our vision to fruition.”

Definition and Strategy

Drs. Stucky and Percelay attended the Pediatric Hospital Medicine (PHM) Strategic Planning Roundtable and serve on the roundtable’s planning committee. SHM, the Academic Pediatric Association (APA), and the American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP) sponsored the gathering, which included young and veteran pediatric hospitalists, clinicians, researchers, and hospitalists from academic, children’s, and community hospitals. The net was cast far and wide to gather information from a broad cross-section of stakeholders.

We have gone through our adolescence and now we are a big community. We’re active at almost all the major medical centers and we need to step up to the plate.

—Jack Percelay, MD, MPH, FHM, pediatric hospitalist, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, New York City, SHM board member

As pediatric hospitalists strive to better demonstrate how they can help hospitals improve the quality of patient care and safety while decreasing its cost, the roundtable is charged with defining and educating healthcare professionals on the key issues. Also in the crosshairs: simultaneously advancing evidence-based medicine and family-based care.

 

 

“We need to distinguish that we are not just house physicians, but really establish ourselves as content-area knowledge experts,” Dr. Percelay says. In other words, pediatric hospitalists are physicians who specialize in effective and efficient medicine in resource-intensive facilities.

Pediatric hospitalists also grapple with how to enhance career satisfaction and sustainability at a time when many PHM programs require a burdensome clinical load that fosters burnout. Many PHM leaders also think pediatric hospitalists need extra training but fear they will lose those physicians to fellowships. And as the PHM ranks fill with physicians who have little or no outpatient training, there is the challenge of explaining the capabilities and limitations pediatric hospitalists and primary-care physicians (PCPs) have in order to avoid unrealistic expectations and friction.

How to Get Involved

Want to learn about volunteer opportunities with the PHM strategic initiative projects, read draft reports issued by the project teams, or receive updates about how the initiatives are going? Your best bet is to join the Section on Hospital Medicine listserv run by AAP. To subscribe, fill out the enrollment form at www.aap.org/sections/hospcare/

listservSOHM.pdf, or send an e-mail to Niccole Alexander, manager of AAP’s division of hospital and surgical services, at [email protected].

Participants in the strategic roundtable aim to address several broad goals outlined in an executive summary, which can be viewed in the “Section on Hospital Medicine” on the AAP Web site (www.aap.org/sections/hospcare/default.cfm). The following are some of the goals:

  • Ensure care for hospitalized children is fully integrated and includes the medical home;
  • Design and support systems for children that eliminate harm associated with hospital care;
  • Develop a skilled and stable workforce that provides expert care for hospitalized children;
  • Use collaborative research models to answer questions of clinical efficacy, comparative effectiveness, and quality improvement inclusive of patient safety, and deliver care based on that knowledge;
  • Provide the expertise that supports innovative continuing education in the care of the hospitalized child for pediatric hospitalists, trainees, midlevel providers, and hospital staff;
  • Create value and provide academic and systems leadership for patients and organizations based on pediatric hospitalists’ unique expertise in PHM clinical care, research, and education; and
  • Be leaders and influential agents in local, state, and national healthcare policies that affect hospital care.

Although it was discussed, the roundtable decided against the establishment of a professional organization for pediatric hospitalists. Instead, the group agreed to continue to utilize the resources and organizational support provided by SHM, APA, and AAP. All three groups contributed money to the roundtable, sent representatives to the meeting, and are interested in the results.

DRASCHWARTZ/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM
80 pediatric hospitalists have volunteered to help with the PHM roundtable strategic initiatives.

“The Academic Pediatric Association has been involved with pediatric hospital medicine from the beginning, and we plan on continuing our involvement,” says Daniel Rauch, MD, FHM, associate director of pediatrics at Elmhurst Hospital Center in New York City and co-chair of the APA’s Hospital Medicine Special Interest Group, which is paying close attention to PHM education and research issues.

Strategic Initiatives

The roundtable established four workgroups: clinical practice/workforce, quality and safety, research, and education. The workgroups are directed to create strategic initiative projects focused on advancing the goals laid out at the roundtable meeting and complete most of the projects no later than the July 2010 PHM Conference in Minneapolis (see “A Closer Look at the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Initiatives,” p. 7). At the 2009 PHM conference in Tampa, Fla., roundtable participants reported on some of the initiatives’ preliminary results.

 

 

“I walked away … energized and ready to help change the world, which is a pretty great feeling,” says Jennifer Daru, MD, FAAP, FHM, chief of the division of pediatric hospital medicine at California Pacific Medical Center in San Francisco and co-leader of the roundtable’s clinical practice/workforce workgroup.

One of Dr. Daru’s workgroup’s strategic initiative projects should make Dr. Hale and his pediatric hospitalists at Central Maine Medical Center happy. Dr. Daru’s group is creating a clinical practice dashboard template that PHM programs can use to internally track patient care and compare themselves with other programs and national standards.

“I think very few programs have a dashboard, because it’s a relatively newer thing for pediatric hospital medicine,” Dr. Daru says. “With this dashboard, we want to be able to say, ‘Here are the things you should look at to ensure quality care for your kids, and as you look at them, you should probably track them over time.’ ”

Steve Narang, MD, medical director of quality/safety and pediatric emergency services at Our Lady of the Lake Regional Medical Center and Children’s Hospital in Baton Rouge, La., is leading the quality and safety workgroup, which is focused on patient identification, patient handoffs between pediatric hospitalists and PCPs, and clinical outcomes for common pediatric diagnoses.

“Most doctors don’t like standardized forms or cookbook medicine, but they do understand good care. Hopefully, we will show success in these initiatives and they will serve as a launching pad to other initiatives,” Dr. Narang says.

Contribute to The Hospitalist

Have a story idea or a clinical question? We’d like to hear about it. Send your questions and story ideas to editor Jason Carris, [email protected], or to physician editor Jeff Glasheen, MD, FHM, [email protected].

Dr. Hale, for one, is excited by the initiatives and workgroups, and optimistic the strategic projects will help his program. In recent years, the PHM community has talked about these kinds of advances, and he’s encouraged to see them moving forward. “These initiatives contribute to the strength of our field,” says Dr. Hale, who also serves on the executive board of AAP’s Maine chapter.

About 80 pediatric hospitalists have volunteered to help with the strategic initiatives. Earlier this year, a request for help was broadcast over the Section on Hospital Medicine listserv run by the AAP. It was announced at HM09 in Chicago and the PHM conference in Tampa. Everyone who submitted a resume or CV, references, and a statement of interest is included, Dr. Percelay says. “This is not supposed to be some exclusive club that no one can get into,” he says. “We are committed to a transparent process.”

While the application deadline has passed, organizers expect additional calls for volunteers in the future as strategic projects move forward, projects are added, and current volunteers depart (see “How to Get Involved,” above).

“They will be the next volunteer go-tos. We will essentially build them into new projects that come up or if gaps emerge,” Dr. Daru says. “We want to have as many people as possible who are really motivated.”

Group Effort

You don’t necessarily have to volunteer for workgroups to be a part of the broader effort. You can read and comment on draft reports released by some of the project teams, or review the roundtable’s executive summary and find ways to apply the vision and goals to your own PHM program, says Mark Shen, MD, medical director of hospital medicine at Dell Children’s Medical Center in Austin, Texas, and pediatric editor of The Hospitalist.

 

 

“If each pediatric hospitalist set strategic initiatives for their own group or hospital, chances are they would find remarkable similarity between what they came up with and what the strategic planning roundtable came up with,” says Dr. Shen, who is directing one of the quality and safety workgroup’s initiatives. “There are plenty of ways to think globally and act locally.” TH

Lisa Ryan is a freelance writer based in New Jersey.

Top Image Source: HOMER SYKES/ALAMY

A Closer Look at the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Initiatives

Four workgroups emerged from the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Strategic Planning Roundtable in February. Each group was charged with directing strategic initiative projects over the next 16 to 18 months. The mission is to transform the delivery of hospital care for children. Here is a synopsis of the workgroup initiatives, some of which have estimated completion dates:

SJLOCKE/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM
SJLOCKE/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

Clinical Practice/Workforce

  • Create a PHM position paper that defines what it means to be a pediatric hospitalist and where the field is headed. A progress report is to be published within the next few months.
  • Create a clinical practice dashboard template that PHM programs can use to monitor patient care and eventually compare their program with other programs and national standards. The template will include such markers as patient readmissions and pediatric rapid response events that PHM programs should measure and track. The first version of the dashboard template should be ready by the end of 2009; test sites are to be selected by 2010.
  • Develop a “return on investment” document to help pediatric hospitalists effectively discuss with hospital administrators and other stakeholders the benefits of adding or expanding PHM programs. Target deadline: February 2010.
  • Assess career satisfaction among pediatric hospitalists. A large part of this initiative will involve SHM’s career satisfaction survey.

Quality and Safety

  • Launch a safety project involving six to eight hospitals that is aimed at improving pediatric patient identification. Preliminary results are expected by July 2010.
  • Develop a standardized communications tool that pediatric hospitalists can use when handing off patients to primary-care physicians after patients leave the hospital.
  • Create a benchmarking process for the most common pediatric inpatient diagnoses (e.g., bronchiolitis, skin infections, and pneumonia) by expanding the Value in Inpatient Pediatrics (VIP) Network, a pediatric-hospitalist-led effort to find cost-effective ways to treat patients.

Research

  • Restructure the existing Pediatric Research in Inpatient Settings (PRIS) network, an independent entity founded through a joint SHM-AAP-APA effort, to better advance research on issues important to pediatric care.
  • Secure funding to conduct studies relevant to inpatient pediatrics. Tap into American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA) funding for comparative effectiveness research. Target deadline: ARRA proposals by fall 2009.
  • Create a mentorship system to connect pediatric hospitalists who are interested in research with PHM researchers through the AAP listserv.

Education

  • Develop an educational plan supporting PHM core competencies to assist medical schools, post-graduate training programs, and continuing medical education programs in PHM teaching. The core competencies should be released by the end of the year.
  • Meet the needs of PHM educators by focusing efforts on topics of interest to them, such as family-centered rounds, night float curriculum, and handoffs. Establish a repository of curriculum information that educators can access for guidance.

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Sections

There are times when Dan Hale, MD, FAAP, wishes he had more standardized tools to use when he leads a team of four full-time and four part-time pediatric hospitalists at Central Maine Medical Center (CMMC) in Lewiston. Even after five years at the community hospital, the pediatric HM program still is searching for the best way to hand off patients who are leaving the hospital to their primary-care physicians (PCPs).

It also would be beneficial to have markers against which CMMC could compare itself with similarly sized pediatric HM programs around the country, says Dr. Hale, chief of pediatrics at the medical center. CMMC, which averages about 4,000 patient encounters per year, is one of three hospitals in the state with a pediatric HM program. “It would be nice to see progress being made in these areas,” he says.

Dr. Hale might not have to wait long to see his wishes granted. More than 20 pediatric hospitalists from across the nation met in Chicago earlier this year, intent on developing a strategic framework for pediatric HM (PHM). About 10% of the 30,000-plus hospitalists practicing in the U.S. focus exclusively on pediatrics, according to SHM’s 2007-2008 “Bi-Annual Survey on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement.” Like the hospitalist movement in general, PHM is growing in number and influence as pediatric hospitalists take on leadership roles and develop working relationships with hospital administrators. The time has come to clearly define the discipline for other physicians, as well as patients and their families, and leverage PHM’s growth and usefulness to improve medical care for children, says Erin Stucky, MD, FHM, a pediatric hospitalist at Rady Children’s Hospital and Health Center in San Diego.

With this dashboard, we want to be able to say, “Here are the things you should look at to ensure quality care for your kids, and as you look at them, you should probably track them over time.”

—Jennifer Daru, MD, FAAP, FHM, chief, division of pediatric hospital medicine, California Pacific Medical Center, San Francisco

“It’s a little bit of pie in the sky, a little bit of rose-colored glasses, but it’s good to aim high,” she says.

Some PHM leaders think the subspecialty has advanced enough in recent years to apply its collective knowledge and influence on a broader stage. “We have gone through our adolescence, and now we are a big community,” says Jack Percelay, MD, MPH, FHM, a pediatric hospitalist at Saint Barnabas Medical Center in New York City and SHM board member. “We’re active at almost all the major medical centers and we need to step up to the plate. We need to start the hard work of bringing our vision to fruition.”

Definition and Strategy

Drs. Stucky and Percelay attended the Pediatric Hospital Medicine (PHM) Strategic Planning Roundtable and serve on the roundtable’s planning committee. SHM, the Academic Pediatric Association (APA), and the American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP) sponsored the gathering, which included young and veteran pediatric hospitalists, clinicians, researchers, and hospitalists from academic, children’s, and community hospitals. The net was cast far and wide to gather information from a broad cross-section of stakeholders.

We have gone through our adolescence and now we are a big community. We’re active at almost all the major medical centers and we need to step up to the plate.

—Jack Percelay, MD, MPH, FHM, pediatric hospitalist, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, New York City, SHM board member

As pediatric hospitalists strive to better demonstrate how they can help hospitals improve the quality of patient care and safety while decreasing its cost, the roundtable is charged with defining and educating healthcare professionals on the key issues. Also in the crosshairs: simultaneously advancing evidence-based medicine and family-based care.

 

 

“We need to distinguish that we are not just house physicians, but really establish ourselves as content-area knowledge experts,” Dr. Percelay says. In other words, pediatric hospitalists are physicians who specialize in effective and efficient medicine in resource-intensive facilities.

Pediatric hospitalists also grapple with how to enhance career satisfaction and sustainability at a time when many PHM programs require a burdensome clinical load that fosters burnout. Many PHM leaders also think pediatric hospitalists need extra training but fear they will lose those physicians to fellowships. And as the PHM ranks fill with physicians who have little or no outpatient training, there is the challenge of explaining the capabilities and limitations pediatric hospitalists and primary-care physicians (PCPs) have in order to avoid unrealistic expectations and friction.

How to Get Involved

Want to learn about volunteer opportunities with the PHM strategic initiative projects, read draft reports issued by the project teams, or receive updates about how the initiatives are going? Your best bet is to join the Section on Hospital Medicine listserv run by AAP. To subscribe, fill out the enrollment form at www.aap.org/sections/hospcare/

listservSOHM.pdf, or send an e-mail to Niccole Alexander, manager of AAP’s division of hospital and surgical services, at [email protected].

Participants in the strategic roundtable aim to address several broad goals outlined in an executive summary, which can be viewed in the “Section on Hospital Medicine” on the AAP Web site (www.aap.org/sections/hospcare/default.cfm). The following are some of the goals:

  • Ensure care for hospitalized children is fully integrated and includes the medical home;
  • Design and support systems for children that eliminate harm associated with hospital care;
  • Develop a skilled and stable workforce that provides expert care for hospitalized children;
  • Use collaborative research models to answer questions of clinical efficacy, comparative effectiveness, and quality improvement inclusive of patient safety, and deliver care based on that knowledge;
  • Provide the expertise that supports innovative continuing education in the care of the hospitalized child for pediatric hospitalists, trainees, midlevel providers, and hospital staff;
  • Create value and provide academic and systems leadership for patients and organizations based on pediatric hospitalists’ unique expertise in PHM clinical care, research, and education; and
  • Be leaders and influential agents in local, state, and national healthcare policies that affect hospital care.

Although it was discussed, the roundtable decided against the establishment of a professional organization for pediatric hospitalists. Instead, the group agreed to continue to utilize the resources and organizational support provided by SHM, APA, and AAP. All three groups contributed money to the roundtable, sent representatives to the meeting, and are interested in the results.

DRASCHWARTZ/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM
80 pediatric hospitalists have volunteered to help with the PHM roundtable strategic initiatives.

“The Academic Pediatric Association has been involved with pediatric hospital medicine from the beginning, and we plan on continuing our involvement,” says Daniel Rauch, MD, FHM, associate director of pediatrics at Elmhurst Hospital Center in New York City and co-chair of the APA’s Hospital Medicine Special Interest Group, which is paying close attention to PHM education and research issues.

Strategic Initiatives

The roundtable established four workgroups: clinical practice/workforce, quality and safety, research, and education. The workgroups are directed to create strategic initiative projects focused on advancing the goals laid out at the roundtable meeting and complete most of the projects no later than the July 2010 PHM Conference in Minneapolis (see “A Closer Look at the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Initiatives,” p. 7). At the 2009 PHM conference in Tampa, Fla., roundtable participants reported on some of the initiatives’ preliminary results.

 

 

“I walked away … energized and ready to help change the world, which is a pretty great feeling,” says Jennifer Daru, MD, FAAP, FHM, chief of the division of pediatric hospital medicine at California Pacific Medical Center in San Francisco and co-leader of the roundtable’s clinical practice/workforce workgroup.

One of Dr. Daru’s workgroup’s strategic initiative projects should make Dr. Hale and his pediatric hospitalists at Central Maine Medical Center happy. Dr. Daru’s group is creating a clinical practice dashboard template that PHM programs can use to internally track patient care and compare themselves with other programs and national standards.

“I think very few programs have a dashboard, because it’s a relatively newer thing for pediatric hospital medicine,” Dr. Daru says. “With this dashboard, we want to be able to say, ‘Here are the things you should look at to ensure quality care for your kids, and as you look at them, you should probably track them over time.’ ”

Steve Narang, MD, medical director of quality/safety and pediatric emergency services at Our Lady of the Lake Regional Medical Center and Children’s Hospital in Baton Rouge, La., is leading the quality and safety workgroup, which is focused on patient identification, patient handoffs between pediatric hospitalists and PCPs, and clinical outcomes for common pediatric diagnoses.

“Most doctors don’t like standardized forms or cookbook medicine, but they do understand good care. Hopefully, we will show success in these initiatives and they will serve as a launching pad to other initiatives,” Dr. Narang says.

Contribute to The Hospitalist

Have a story idea or a clinical question? We’d like to hear about it. Send your questions and story ideas to editor Jason Carris, [email protected], or to physician editor Jeff Glasheen, MD, FHM, [email protected].

Dr. Hale, for one, is excited by the initiatives and workgroups, and optimistic the strategic projects will help his program. In recent years, the PHM community has talked about these kinds of advances, and he’s encouraged to see them moving forward. “These initiatives contribute to the strength of our field,” says Dr. Hale, who also serves on the executive board of AAP’s Maine chapter.

About 80 pediatric hospitalists have volunteered to help with the strategic initiatives. Earlier this year, a request for help was broadcast over the Section on Hospital Medicine listserv run by the AAP. It was announced at HM09 in Chicago and the PHM conference in Tampa. Everyone who submitted a resume or CV, references, and a statement of interest is included, Dr. Percelay says. “This is not supposed to be some exclusive club that no one can get into,” he says. “We are committed to a transparent process.”

While the application deadline has passed, organizers expect additional calls for volunteers in the future as strategic projects move forward, projects are added, and current volunteers depart (see “How to Get Involved,” above).

“They will be the next volunteer go-tos. We will essentially build them into new projects that come up or if gaps emerge,” Dr. Daru says. “We want to have as many people as possible who are really motivated.”

Group Effort

You don’t necessarily have to volunteer for workgroups to be a part of the broader effort. You can read and comment on draft reports released by some of the project teams, or review the roundtable’s executive summary and find ways to apply the vision and goals to your own PHM program, says Mark Shen, MD, medical director of hospital medicine at Dell Children’s Medical Center in Austin, Texas, and pediatric editor of The Hospitalist.

 

 

“If each pediatric hospitalist set strategic initiatives for their own group or hospital, chances are they would find remarkable similarity between what they came up with and what the strategic planning roundtable came up with,” says Dr. Shen, who is directing one of the quality and safety workgroup’s initiatives. “There are plenty of ways to think globally and act locally.” TH

Lisa Ryan is a freelance writer based in New Jersey.

Top Image Source: HOMER SYKES/ALAMY

A Closer Look at the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Initiatives

Four workgroups emerged from the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Strategic Planning Roundtable in February. Each group was charged with directing strategic initiative projects over the next 16 to 18 months. The mission is to transform the delivery of hospital care for children. Here is a synopsis of the workgroup initiatives, some of which have estimated completion dates:

SJLOCKE/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM
SJLOCKE/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

Clinical Practice/Workforce

  • Create a PHM position paper that defines what it means to be a pediatric hospitalist and where the field is headed. A progress report is to be published within the next few months.
  • Create a clinical practice dashboard template that PHM programs can use to monitor patient care and eventually compare their program with other programs and national standards. The template will include such markers as patient readmissions and pediatric rapid response events that PHM programs should measure and track. The first version of the dashboard template should be ready by the end of 2009; test sites are to be selected by 2010.
  • Develop a “return on investment” document to help pediatric hospitalists effectively discuss with hospital administrators and other stakeholders the benefits of adding or expanding PHM programs. Target deadline: February 2010.
  • Assess career satisfaction among pediatric hospitalists. A large part of this initiative will involve SHM’s career satisfaction survey.

Quality and Safety

  • Launch a safety project involving six to eight hospitals that is aimed at improving pediatric patient identification. Preliminary results are expected by July 2010.
  • Develop a standardized communications tool that pediatric hospitalists can use when handing off patients to primary-care physicians after patients leave the hospital.
  • Create a benchmarking process for the most common pediatric inpatient diagnoses (e.g., bronchiolitis, skin infections, and pneumonia) by expanding the Value in Inpatient Pediatrics (VIP) Network, a pediatric-hospitalist-led effort to find cost-effective ways to treat patients.

Research

  • Restructure the existing Pediatric Research in Inpatient Settings (PRIS) network, an independent entity founded through a joint SHM-AAP-APA effort, to better advance research on issues important to pediatric care.
  • Secure funding to conduct studies relevant to inpatient pediatrics. Tap into American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA) funding for comparative effectiveness research. Target deadline: ARRA proposals by fall 2009.
  • Create a mentorship system to connect pediatric hospitalists who are interested in research with PHM researchers through the AAP listserv.

Education

  • Develop an educational plan supporting PHM core competencies to assist medical schools, post-graduate training programs, and continuing medical education programs in PHM teaching. The core competencies should be released by the end of the year.
  • Meet the needs of PHM educators by focusing efforts on topics of interest to them, such as family-centered rounds, night float curriculum, and handoffs. Establish a repository of curriculum information that educators can access for guidance.

There are times when Dan Hale, MD, FAAP, wishes he had more standardized tools to use when he leads a team of four full-time and four part-time pediatric hospitalists at Central Maine Medical Center (CMMC) in Lewiston. Even after five years at the community hospital, the pediatric HM program still is searching for the best way to hand off patients who are leaving the hospital to their primary-care physicians (PCPs).

It also would be beneficial to have markers against which CMMC could compare itself with similarly sized pediatric HM programs around the country, says Dr. Hale, chief of pediatrics at the medical center. CMMC, which averages about 4,000 patient encounters per year, is one of three hospitals in the state with a pediatric HM program. “It would be nice to see progress being made in these areas,” he says.

Dr. Hale might not have to wait long to see his wishes granted. More than 20 pediatric hospitalists from across the nation met in Chicago earlier this year, intent on developing a strategic framework for pediatric HM (PHM). About 10% of the 30,000-plus hospitalists practicing in the U.S. focus exclusively on pediatrics, according to SHM’s 2007-2008 “Bi-Annual Survey on the State of the Hospital Medicine Movement.” Like the hospitalist movement in general, PHM is growing in number and influence as pediatric hospitalists take on leadership roles and develop working relationships with hospital administrators. The time has come to clearly define the discipline for other physicians, as well as patients and their families, and leverage PHM’s growth and usefulness to improve medical care for children, says Erin Stucky, MD, FHM, a pediatric hospitalist at Rady Children’s Hospital and Health Center in San Diego.

With this dashboard, we want to be able to say, “Here are the things you should look at to ensure quality care for your kids, and as you look at them, you should probably track them over time.”

—Jennifer Daru, MD, FAAP, FHM, chief, division of pediatric hospital medicine, California Pacific Medical Center, San Francisco

“It’s a little bit of pie in the sky, a little bit of rose-colored glasses, but it’s good to aim high,” she says.

Some PHM leaders think the subspecialty has advanced enough in recent years to apply its collective knowledge and influence on a broader stage. “We have gone through our adolescence, and now we are a big community,” says Jack Percelay, MD, MPH, FHM, a pediatric hospitalist at Saint Barnabas Medical Center in New York City and SHM board member. “We’re active at almost all the major medical centers and we need to step up to the plate. We need to start the hard work of bringing our vision to fruition.”

Definition and Strategy

Drs. Stucky and Percelay attended the Pediatric Hospital Medicine (PHM) Strategic Planning Roundtable and serve on the roundtable’s planning committee. SHM, the Academic Pediatric Association (APA), and the American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP) sponsored the gathering, which included young and veteran pediatric hospitalists, clinicians, researchers, and hospitalists from academic, children’s, and community hospitals. The net was cast far and wide to gather information from a broad cross-section of stakeholders.

We have gone through our adolescence and now we are a big community. We’re active at almost all the major medical centers and we need to step up to the plate.

—Jack Percelay, MD, MPH, FHM, pediatric hospitalist, Saint Barnabas Medical Center, New York City, SHM board member

As pediatric hospitalists strive to better demonstrate how they can help hospitals improve the quality of patient care and safety while decreasing its cost, the roundtable is charged with defining and educating healthcare professionals on the key issues. Also in the crosshairs: simultaneously advancing evidence-based medicine and family-based care.

 

 

“We need to distinguish that we are not just house physicians, but really establish ourselves as content-area knowledge experts,” Dr. Percelay says. In other words, pediatric hospitalists are physicians who specialize in effective and efficient medicine in resource-intensive facilities.

Pediatric hospitalists also grapple with how to enhance career satisfaction and sustainability at a time when many PHM programs require a burdensome clinical load that fosters burnout. Many PHM leaders also think pediatric hospitalists need extra training but fear they will lose those physicians to fellowships. And as the PHM ranks fill with physicians who have little or no outpatient training, there is the challenge of explaining the capabilities and limitations pediatric hospitalists and primary-care physicians (PCPs) have in order to avoid unrealistic expectations and friction.

How to Get Involved

Want to learn about volunteer opportunities with the PHM strategic initiative projects, read draft reports issued by the project teams, or receive updates about how the initiatives are going? Your best bet is to join the Section on Hospital Medicine listserv run by AAP. To subscribe, fill out the enrollment form at www.aap.org/sections/hospcare/

listservSOHM.pdf, or send an e-mail to Niccole Alexander, manager of AAP’s division of hospital and surgical services, at [email protected].

Participants in the strategic roundtable aim to address several broad goals outlined in an executive summary, which can be viewed in the “Section on Hospital Medicine” on the AAP Web site (www.aap.org/sections/hospcare/default.cfm). The following are some of the goals:

  • Ensure care for hospitalized children is fully integrated and includes the medical home;
  • Design and support systems for children that eliminate harm associated with hospital care;
  • Develop a skilled and stable workforce that provides expert care for hospitalized children;
  • Use collaborative research models to answer questions of clinical efficacy, comparative effectiveness, and quality improvement inclusive of patient safety, and deliver care based on that knowledge;
  • Provide the expertise that supports innovative continuing education in the care of the hospitalized child for pediatric hospitalists, trainees, midlevel providers, and hospital staff;
  • Create value and provide academic and systems leadership for patients and organizations based on pediatric hospitalists’ unique expertise in PHM clinical care, research, and education; and
  • Be leaders and influential agents in local, state, and national healthcare policies that affect hospital care.

Although it was discussed, the roundtable decided against the establishment of a professional organization for pediatric hospitalists. Instead, the group agreed to continue to utilize the resources and organizational support provided by SHM, APA, and AAP. All three groups contributed money to the roundtable, sent representatives to the meeting, and are interested in the results.

DRASCHWARTZ/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM
80 pediatric hospitalists have volunteered to help with the PHM roundtable strategic initiatives.

“The Academic Pediatric Association has been involved with pediatric hospital medicine from the beginning, and we plan on continuing our involvement,” says Daniel Rauch, MD, FHM, associate director of pediatrics at Elmhurst Hospital Center in New York City and co-chair of the APA’s Hospital Medicine Special Interest Group, which is paying close attention to PHM education and research issues.

Strategic Initiatives

The roundtable established four workgroups: clinical practice/workforce, quality and safety, research, and education. The workgroups are directed to create strategic initiative projects focused on advancing the goals laid out at the roundtable meeting and complete most of the projects no later than the July 2010 PHM Conference in Minneapolis (see “A Closer Look at the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Initiatives,” p. 7). At the 2009 PHM conference in Tampa, Fla., roundtable participants reported on some of the initiatives’ preliminary results.

 

 

“I walked away … energized and ready to help change the world, which is a pretty great feeling,” says Jennifer Daru, MD, FAAP, FHM, chief of the division of pediatric hospital medicine at California Pacific Medical Center in San Francisco and co-leader of the roundtable’s clinical practice/workforce workgroup.

One of Dr. Daru’s workgroup’s strategic initiative projects should make Dr. Hale and his pediatric hospitalists at Central Maine Medical Center happy. Dr. Daru’s group is creating a clinical practice dashboard template that PHM programs can use to internally track patient care and compare themselves with other programs and national standards.

“I think very few programs have a dashboard, because it’s a relatively newer thing for pediatric hospital medicine,” Dr. Daru says. “With this dashboard, we want to be able to say, ‘Here are the things you should look at to ensure quality care for your kids, and as you look at them, you should probably track them over time.’ ”

Steve Narang, MD, medical director of quality/safety and pediatric emergency services at Our Lady of the Lake Regional Medical Center and Children’s Hospital in Baton Rouge, La., is leading the quality and safety workgroup, which is focused on patient identification, patient handoffs between pediatric hospitalists and PCPs, and clinical outcomes for common pediatric diagnoses.

“Most doctors don’t like standardized forms or cookbook medicine, but they do understand good care. Hopefully, we will show success in these initiatives and they will serve as a launching pad to other initiatives,” Dr. Narang says.

Contribute to The Hospitalist

Have a story idea or a clinical question? We’d like to hear about it. Send your questions and story ideas to editor Jason Carris, [email protected], or to physician editor Jeff Glasheen, MD, FHM, [email protected].

Dr. Hale, for one, is excited by the initiatives and workgroups, and optimistic the strategic projects will help his program. In recent years, the PHM community has talked about these kinds of advances, and he’s encouraged to see them moving forward. “These initiatives contribute to the strength of our field,” says Dr. Hale, who also serves on the executive board of AAP’s Maine chapter.

About 80 pediatric hospitalists have volunteered to help with the strategic initiatives. Earlier this year, a request for help was broadcast over the Section on Hospital Medicine listserv run by the AAP. It was announced at HM09 in Chicago and the PHM conference in Tampa. Everyone who submitted a resume or CV, references, and a statement of interest is included, Dr. Percelay says. “This is not supposed to be some exclusive club that no one can get into,” he says. “We are committed to a transparent process.”

While the application deadline has passed, organizers expect additional calls for volunteers in the future as strategic projects move forward, projects are added, and current volunteers depart (see “How to Get Involved,” above).

“They will be the next volunteer go-tos. We will essentially build them into new projects that come up or if gaps emerge,” Dr. Daru says. “We want to have as many people as possible who are really motivated.”

Group Effort

You don’t necessarily have to volunteer for workgroups to be a part of the broader effort. You can read and comment on draft reports released by some of the project teams, or review the roundtable’s executive summary and find ways to apply the vision and goals to your own PHM program, says Mark Shen, MD, medical director of hospital medicine at Dell Children’s Medical Center in Austin, Texas, and pediatric editor of The Hospitalist.

 

 

“If each pediatric hospitalist set strategic initiatives for their own group or hospital, chances are they would find remarkable similarity between what they came up with and what the strategic planning roundtable came up with,” says Dr. Shen, who is directing one of the quality and safety workgroup’s initiatives. “There are plenty of ways to think globally and act locally.” TH

Lisa Ryan is a freelance writer based in New Jersey.

Top Image Source: HOMER SYKES/ALAMY

A Closer Look at the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Initiatives

Four workgroups emerged from the Pediatric Hospital Medicine Strategic Planning Roundtable in February. Each group was charged with directing strategic initiative projects over the next 16 to 18 months. The mission is to transform the delivery of hospital care for children. Here is a synopsis of the workgroup initiatives, some of which have estimated completion dates:

SJLOCKE/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM
SJLOCKE/ISTOCKPHOTO.COM

Clinical Practice/Workforce

  • Create a PHM position paper that defines what it means to be a pediatric hospitalist and where the field is headed. A progress report is to be published within the next few months.
  • Create a clinical practice dashboard template that PHM programs can use to monitor patient care and eventually compare their program with other programs and national standards. The template will include such markers as patient readmissions and pediatric rapid response events that PHM programs should measure and track. The first version of the dashboard template should be ready by the end of 2009; test sites are to be selected by 2010.
  • Develop a “return on investment” document to help pediatric hospitalists effectively discuss with hospital administrators and other stakeholders the benefits of adding or expanding PHM programs. Target deadline: February 2010.
  • Assess career satisfaction among pediatric hospitalists. A large part of this initiative will involve SHM’s career satisfaction survey.

Quality and Safety

  • Launch a safety project involving six to eight hospitals that is aimed at improving pediatric patient identification. Preliminary results are expected by July 2010.
  • Develop a standardized communications tool that pediatric hospitalists can use when handing off patients to primary-care physicians after patients leave the hospital.
  • Create a benchmarking process for the most common pediatric inpatient diagnoses (e.g., bronchiolitis, skin infections, and pneumonia) by expanding the Value in Inpatient Pediatrics (VIP) Network, a pediatric-hospitalist-led effort to find cost-effective ways to treat patients.

Research

  • Restructure the existing Pediatric Research in Inpatient Settings (PRIS) network, an independent entity founded through a joint SHM-AAP-APA effort, to better advance research on issues important to pediatric care.
  • Secure funding to conduct studies relevant to inpatient pediatrics. Tap into American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA) funding for comparative effectiveness research. Target deadline: ARRA proposals by fall 2009.
  • Create a mentorship system to connect pediatric hospitalists who are interested in research with PHM researchers through the AAP listserv.

Education

  • Develop an educational plan supporting PHM core competencies to assist medical schools, post-graduate training programs, and continuing medical education programs in PHM teaching. The core competencies should be released by the end of the year.
  • Meet the needs of PHM educators by focusing efforts on topics of interest to them, such as family-centered rounds, night float curriculum, and handoffs. Establish a repository of curriculum information that educators can access for guidance.

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
All Grown Up
Display Headline
All Grown Up
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Jack Percelay, MD, FHM

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:32
Display Headline
ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Jack Percelay, MD, FHM

Dr. Percelay, an SHM board member, says pediatric hospitalists need to: "establish ourselves as content-area knowledge experts” who specialize in effective and efficient medicine in resource-intensive facilities.

Click here to listen to the audio file

Audio / Podcast
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Sections
Audio / Podcast
Audio / Podcast

Dr. Percelay, an SHM board member, says pediatric hospitalists need to: "establish ourselves as content-area knowledge experts” who specialize in effective and efficient medicine in resource-intensive facilities.

Click here to listen to the audio file

Dr. Percelay, an SHM board member, says pediatric hospitalists need to: "establish ourselves as content-area knowledge experts” who specialize in effective and efficient medicine in resource-intensive facilities.

Click here to listen to the audio file

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Jack Percelay, MD, FHM
Display Headline
ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Jack Percelay, MD, FHM
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Lee H. Schwamm, MD

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:32
Display Headline
ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Lee H. Schwamm, MD

Massachusetts General Hospital and Brigham and Women’s Hospital are the Boston-based hubs for the Partners TeleStroke Network. The system connects 27 participating hospitals across three states with an escalating chain of access to stroke resources. Spoke hospitals transmit, through a secure link, such clinical data as noncontrast head CT scans to the hub, where a stroke expert “examines” the patient via live video feed and shares in the responsibility for deciding whether to initiate t-PA.

Click here to listen to the audio file.

Audio / Podcast
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Sections
Audio / Podcast
Audio / Podcast

Massachusetts General Hospital and Brigham and Women’s Hospital are the Boston-based hubs for the Partners TeleStroke Network. The system connects 27 participating hospitals across three states with an escalating chain of access to stroke resources. Spoke hospitals transmit, through a secure link, such clinical data as noncontrast head CT scans to the hub, where a stroke expert “examines” the patient via live video feed and shares in the responsibility for deciding whether to initiate t-PA.

Click here to listen to the audio file.

Massachusetts General Hospital and Brigham and Women’s Hospital are the Boston-based hubs for the Partners TeleStroke Network. The system connects 27 participating hospitals across three states with an escalating chain of access to stroke resources. Spoke hospitals transmit, through a secure link, such clinical data as noncontrast head CT scans to the hub, where a stroke expert “examines” the patient via live video feed and shares in the responsibility for deciding whether to initiate t-PA.

Click here to listen to the audio file.

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2009(12)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Lee H. Schwamm, MD
Display Headline
ONLINE EXCLUSIVE: Audio interview with Lee H. Schwamm, MD
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

The Role of Incretin-Based Therapies in Treating Patients with Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 05/03/2022 - 16:02
Display Headline
The Role of Incretin-Based Therapies in Treating Patients with Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus
Article PDF
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(12)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
S1-S47
Sections
Article PDF
Article PDF
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(12)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 76(12)
Page Number
S1-S47
Page Number
S1-S47
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
The Role of Incretin-Based Therapies in Treating Patients with Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus
Display Headline
The Role of Incretin-Based Therapies in Treating Patients with Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus
Sections
Citation Override
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine 2009 December;76(12 suppl 5):S1-S47
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 11:15
Un-Gate On Date
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 11:15
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 11:15
Hide sidebar & use full width
render the right sidebar.
Article PDF Media

Incretin-based therapies for type 2 diabetes mellitus: New therapeutic mechanisms

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 10/02/2018 - 11:44
Display Headline
Incretin-based therapies for type 2 diabetes mellitus: New therapeutic mechanisms

Almost a decade into the 21st century, the global epidemic of diabetes—which accelerated in the 1970s—shows no sign of slowing. At the same time, our insights into both type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM) have increased at a similarly rapid rate.

At the beginning of the 1970s, it was far from clear whether improved glycemic control made much difference in the long-term well-being of people with diabetes other than to relieve their symptoms of hyperglycemia and decrease the likelihood of diabetic ketoacidosis or hyperglycemic hyperosmolar nonketotic coma. Concerns were expressed about the risk/benefit ratio of antihyperglycemic drugs—so there is nothing new under the sun! The drugs available in the United States were limited to insulin and sulfonylureas. The rest of the world also had access to metformin, but, in truth, its potential was underestimated until much later.

RECOGNIZING THE VALUE OF GLYCEMIC CONTROL

Out of this milieu of scientific uncertainty grew the two clinical trials that effectively ended the debate about the value of glycemic control: the Diabetes Control and Complications Trial (DCCT)1 for type 1 diabetes, and the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS)2,3 for T2DM. The conduct of these trials was facilitated by the timely demonstration of the utility of glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) as an objective measure of glycemic control, and of microalbuminuria as a marker of early nephropathy.

Both the DCCT and the UKPDS, in their initial “end of study” analyses in the 1990s, established the role of glycemic control in reducing the risk of retinopathy, neuropathy, and nephropathy—the microvascular complications of diabetes. Additionally, the UKPDS demonstrated that in T2DM, hypertension management was at least as important as glycemic control in reducing the risk of microvascular complications.

Neither the DCCT nor the UKPDS was powered to determine initially whether glycemic control was a risk factor for cardiovascular disease; however, careful longer-term surveillance of the patient cohorts in the studies has recently borne fruit in this regard. Reports from both studies have shown that efforts to control glycemia early in the course of diabetes are rewarded many years later by a decreased risk of cardiovascular events and death.4,5 This is true even when excellent glycemic control achieved early on is not sustained indefinitely. It has also become widely recognized that the management of diabetes, with prevention of microvascular and cardiovascular disease as major aims, involves much more than a simple preoccupation with glycemic control—important as that is.

NEW TREATMENT OPTIONS

Concurrent with the DCCT and the UKPDS being conducted with, in effect, the therapeutic tools of the 1970s, considerable strides were being made in the development of new classes of antihyperglycemic agents for use in T2DM. These include the thiazolidinediones (TZDs), alpha-glucosidase inhibitors, nonsulfonylurea insulin secretagogues (also known as glinides), and, more recently, the incretin-based drugs that are the focus of this supplement to the Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine.

Understandable enthusiasm for tapping into the hitherto unexploited pathways and mechanisms targeted by a new drug class is inevitably tempered by known, or sometimes unforeseen, adverse effects. Some of the adverse effects typically associated with antihyperglycemic drugs used before the incretin-based therapies became available include hypoglycemia, weight gain, and fluid retention; all of these are perceived as possibly increasing the risk of the very thing we are striving to avoid in diabetes—cardiovascular morbidity and mortality. Such is the concern about this risk—epitomized, rightly or wrongly, in the controversial meta-analysis of clinical trials involving rosiglitazone6—that the US Food and Drug Administration now requires new antihyperglycemic drugs not only to meet efficacy standards for improving glycemia but also to show no sign of increased cardiovascular risk. The requirement must be met in preapproval trials, to be followed by postmarketing studies to prove the lack of cardiovascular risk.

As the contributions in this supplement point out, incretin-based therapies generally are either weight neutral or promote weight loss; by their modes of action, they are unlikely to cause hypoglycemia; and, as shown thus far, they are unassociated with fluid retention or increased likelihood of heart failure. Continued vigilance regarding cardiovascular risk will be important for the new incretin-based therapies, however.

 

 

BETA-CELL FUNCTION STILL A CHALLENGE

Another aspect of T2DM highlighted by the UKPDS is the degree of pancreatic beta-cell function loss—typically about 50% or more—at the time of clinical diagnosis, and the steady decline in function thereafter.7 This, as much as the understandable fatigue with lifestyle modification that normal humans experience, accounts for the frequent failure of oral antihyperglycemic monotherapy or dual therapy to maintain satisfactory glycemic control over the years. Relieving hyperglycemia at the time of diagnosis by any means usually leads to a temporary improvement in beta-cell function, but the possibility of slowing or even reversing the long-term decline has been an elusive therapeutic goal.

Although direct quantitative assessment of beta-cell function in humans is difficult in routine practice or outside of strict research protocols, a randomized study comparing different monotherapies for T2DM showed that over several years, the rise in HbA1c was more gradual with rosiglitazone than with glyburide or metformin; this suggests that, at least compared with metformin and sulfonylureas, the TZDs may have some longer-term benefit with respect to beta-cell function.8

That incretin-based treatments may help preserve or improve beta-cell function has been suggested by animal data.9 Proving that that is the case in humans will be much more challenging. A recent randomized study in patients with T2DM already taking metformin showed that addition of exenatide for 1 year resulted in improved beta-cell function, assessed by C-peptide responses to glucose and to arginine during a combined euglycemic-hyperinsulinemic and hyperglycemic clamp procedure. The improvement was evident compared with baseline function and with patients randomized to receive insulin glargine in addition to metformin for a year.10 However, 4 weeks after exenatide and glargine were discontinued, the beta-cell function had reverted to the pretreatment level and was not significantly different in the two groups of patients. Moreover, 3 months after treatment discontinuation, the HbA1c levels, which had decreased during the year to a similar extent in both groups, had returned to pretreatment levels. The investigators acknowledged that it was impossible in their study to “discriminate between acute and long-term effects of exenatide on beta-cell function.”10 So, in my opinion, the challenge remains to show that meaningful long-term effects on beta-cell function can be achieved with incretin-based therapy.

That said, there is no doubt that the incretin-based therapies bring a new dimension to our ability to treat diabetes. The articles in this supplement will provide both the specialist and nonspecialist with a better understanding of these relatively new therapies.

References
  1. The Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group. The effect of intensive treatment of diabetes on the development and progression of long-term complications in insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 1993; 329:977–986.
  2. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Intensive blood-glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). Lancet 1998; 352:837–853.
  3. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Effect of intensive blood-glucose control with metformin on complications in overweight patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 34). Lancet 1998; 352:854–865.
  4. Nathan DM, Cleary PA, Backlund JY, et al. Intensive diabetes treatment and cardiovascular disease in patients with type 1 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2005; 353:2643–2653.
  5. Holman RR, Paul SK, Bethel MA, Matthews DR, Neil HA. 10-year follow-up of intensive glucose control in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 359:1577–1589.
  6. Nissen SE, Wolski K. Effect of rosiglitazone on the risk of myocardial infarction and death from cardiovascular causes. N Engl J Med 2007; 356:2457–2471.
  7. UK Prospective Diabetes Study Group. UK prospective diabetes study 16: overview of 6 years’ therapy of type II diabetes: a progressive disease. Diabetes 1995; 44:1249–1258.
  8. Kahn SE, Haffner SM, Heise MA, et al. Glycemic durability of rosiglitazone, metformin, or glyburide monotherapy. N Engl J Med 2006; 355:2427–2443.
  9. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ. Biology of incretins: GLP-1 and GIP. Gastro­enterology 2007; 132:2131–2157.
  10. Bunck MC, Diamant M, Cornér A, et al. One-year treatment with exenatide improves beta-cell function, compared with insulin glargine, in metformin-treated type 2 diabetes patients: a randomized, controlled trial. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:762–768.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Laurence Kennedy, MD
Chair, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland, OH

Correspondence: Laurence Kennedy, MD, Chair, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, A53, Cleveland, OH 44195; [email protected]

Dr. Kennedy reported that he has received honoraria from Merck and Co., Inc. He reported that he received an honorarium for serving as editor of this supplement, peer-reviewing the articles, and writing the introduction. The honorarium was paid by the Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine from an educational grant provided by Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., and Eli Lilly and Company, which funded the development and production of the supplement.

Dr. Kennedy reported that he wrote this introduction and received no assistance with content development from unnamed contributors.

Publications
Page Number
S2-S3
Author and Disclosure Information

Laurence Kennedy, MD
Chair, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland, OH

Correspondence: Laurence Kennedy, MD, Chair, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, A53, Cleveland, OH 44195; [email protected]

Dr. Kennedy reported that he has received honoraria from Merck and Co., Inc. He reported that he received an honorarium for serving as editor of this supplement, peer-reviewing the articles, and writing the introduction. The honorarium was paid by the Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine from an educational grant provided by Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., and Eli Lilly and Company, which funded the development and production of the supplement.

Dr. Kennedy reported that he wrote this introduction and received no assistance with content development from unnamed contributors.

Author and Disclosure Information

Laurence Kennedy, MD
Chair, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland, OH

Correspondence: Laurence Kennedy, MD, Chair, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Metabolism, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, A53, Cleveland, OH 44195; [email protected]

Dr. Kennedy reported that he has received honoraria from Merck and Co., Inc. He reported that he received an honorarium for serving as editor of this supplement, peer-reviewing the articles, and writing the introduction. The honorarium was paid by the Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine from an educational grant provided by Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., and Eli Lilly and Company, which funded the development and production of the supplement.

Dr. Kennedy reported that he wrote this introduction and received no assistance with content development from unnamed contributors.

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Almost a decade into the 21st century, the global epidemic of diabetes—which accelerated in the 1970s—shows no sign of slowing. At the same time, our insights into both type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM) have increased at a similarly rapid rate.

At the beginning of the 1970s, it was far from clear whether improved glycemic control made much difference in the long-term well-being of people with diabetes other than to relieve their symptoms of hyperglycemia and decrease the likelihood of diabetic ketoacidosis or hyperglycemic hyperosmolar nonketotic coma. Concerns were expressed about the risk/benefit ratio of antihyperglycemic drugs—so there is nothing new under the sun! The drugs available in the United States were limited to insulin and sulfonylureas. The rest of the world also had access to metformin, but, in truth, its potential was underestimated until much later.

RECOGNIZING THE VALUE OF GLYCEMIC CONTROL

Out of this milieu of scientific uncertainty grew the two clinical trials that effectively ended the debate about the value of glycemic control: the Diabetes Control and Complications Trial (DCCT)1 for type 1 diabetes, and the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS)2,3 for T2DM. The conduct of these trials was facilitated by the timely demonstration of the utility of glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) as an objective measure of glycemic control, and of microalbuminuria as a marker of early nephropathy.

Both the DCCT and the UKPDS, in their initial “end of study” analyses in the 1990s, established the role of glycemic control in reducing the risk of retinopathy, neuropathy, and nephropathy—the microvascular complications of diabetes. Additionally, the UKPDS demonstrated that in T2DM, hypertension management was at least as important as glycemic control in reducing the risk of microvascular complications.

Neither the DCCT nor the UKPDS was powered to determine initially whether glycemic control was a risk factor for cardiovascular disease; however, careful longer-term surveillance of the patient cohorts in the studies has recently borne fruit in this regard. Reports from both studies have shown that efforts to control glycemia early in the course of diabetes are rewarded many years later by a decreased risk of cardiovascular events and death.4,5 This is true even when excellent glycemic control achieved early on is not sustained indefinitely. It has also become widely recognized that the management of diabetes, with prevention of microvascular and cardiovascular disease as major aims, involves much more than a simple preoccupation with glycemic control—important as that is.

NEW TREATMENT OPTIONS

Concurrent with the DCCT and the UKPDS being conducted with, in effect, the therapeutic tools of the 1970s, considerable strides were being made in the development of new classes of antihyperglycemic agents for use in T2DM. These include the thiazolidinediones (TZDs), alpha-glucosidase inhibitors, nonsulfonylurea insulin secretagogues (also known as glinides), and, more recently, the incretin-based drugs that are the focus of this supplement to the Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine.

Understandable enthusiasm for tapping into the hitherto unexploited pathways and mechanisms targeted by a new drug class is inevitably tempered by known, or sometimes unforeseen, adverse effects. Some of the adverse effects typically associated with antihyperglycemic drugs used before the incretin-based therapies became available include hypoglycemia, weight gain, and fluid retention; all of these are perceived as possibly increasing the risk of the very thing we are striving to avoid in diabetes—cardiovascular morbidity and mortality. Such is the concern about this risk—epitomized, rightly or wrongly, in the controversial meta-analysis of clinical trials involving rosiglitazone6—that the US Food and Drug Administration now requires new antihyperglycemic drugs not only to meet efficacy standards for improving glycemia but also to show no sign of increased cardiovascular risk. The requirement must be met in preapproval trials, to be followed by postmarketing studies to prove the lack of cardiovascular risk.

As the contributions in this supplement point out, incretin-based therapies generally are either weight neutral or promote weight loss; by their modes of action, they are unlikely to cause hypoglycemia; and, as shown thus far, they are unassociated with fluid retention or increased likelihood of heart failure. Continued vigilance regarding cardiovascular risk will be important for the new incretin-based therapies, however.

 

 

BETA-CELL FUNCTION STILL A CHALLENGE

Another aspect of T2DM highlighted by the UKPDS is the degree of pancreatic beta-cell function loss—typically about 50% or more—at the time of clinical diagnosis, and the steady decline in function thereafter.7 This, as much as the understandable fatigue with lifestyle modification that normal humans experience, accounts for the frequent failure of oral antihyperglycemic monotherapy or dual therapy to maintain satisfactory glycemic control over the years. Relieving hyperglycemia at the time of diagnosis by any means usually leads to a temporary improvement in beta-cell function, but the possibility of slowing or even reversing the long-term decline has been an elusive therapeutic goal.

Although direct quantitative assessment of beta-cell function in humans is difficult in routine practice or outside of strict research protocols, a randomized study comparing different monotherapies for T2DM showed that over several years, the rise in HbA1c was more gradual with rosiglitazone than with glyburide or metformin; this suggests that, at least compared with metformin and sulfonylureas, the TZDs may have some longer-term benefit with respect to beta-cell function.8

That incretin-based treatments may help preserve or improve beta-cell function has been suggested by animal data.9 Proving that that is the case in humans will be much more challenging. A recent randomized study in patients with T2DM already taking metformin showed that addition of exenatide for 1 year resulted in improved beta-cell function, assessed by C-peptide responses to glucose and to arginine during a combined euglycemic-hyperinsulinemic and hyperglycemic clamp procedure. The improvement was evident compared with baseline function and with patients randomized to receive insulin glargine in addition to metformin for a year.10 However, 4 weeks after exenatide and glargine were discontinued, the beta-cell function had reverted to the pretreatment level and was not significantly different in the two groups of patients. Moreover, 3 months after treatment discontinuation, the HbA1c levels, which had decreased during the year to a similar extent in both groups, had returned to pretreatment levels. The investigators acknowledged that it was impossible in their study to “discriminate between acute and long-term effects of exenatide on beta-cell function.”10 So, in my opinion, the challenge remains to show that meaningful long-term effects on beta-cell function can be achieved with incretin-based therapy.

That said, there is no doubt that the incretin-based therapies bring a new dimension to our ability to treat diabetes. The articles in this supplement will provide both the specialist and nonspecialist with a better understanding of these relatively new therapies.

Almost a decade into the 21st century, the global epidemic of diabetes—which accelerated in the 1970s—shows no sign of slowing. At the same time, our insights into both type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM) have increased at a similarly rapid rate.

At the beginning of the 1970s, it was far from clear whether improved glycemic control made much difference in the long-term well-being of people with diabetes other than to relieve their symptoms of hyperglycemia and decrease the likelihood of diabetic ketoacidosis or hyperglycemic hyperosmolar nonketotic coma. Concerns were expressed about the risk/benefit ratio of antihyperglycemic drugs—so there is nothing new under the sun! The drugs available in the United States were limited to insulin and sulfonylureas. The rest of the world also had access to metformin, but, in truth, its potential was underestimated until much later.

RECOGNIZING THE VALUE OF GLYCEMIC CONTROL

Out of this milieu of scientific uncertainty grew the two clinical trials that effectively ended the debate about the value of glycemic control: the Diabetes Control and Complications Trial (DCCT)1 for type 1 diabetes, and the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS)2,3 for T2DM. The conduct of these trials was facilitated by the timely demonstration of the utility of glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c) as an objective measure of glycemic control, and of microalbuminuria as a marker of early nephropathy.

Both the DCCT and the UKPDS, in their initial “end of study” analyses in the 1990s, established the role of glycemic control in reducing the risk of retinopathy, neuropathy, and nephropathy—the microvascular complications of diabetes. Additionally, the UKPDS demonstrated that in T2DM, hypertension management was at least as important as glycemic control in reducing the risk of microvascular complications.

Neither the DCCT nor the UKPDS was powered to determine initially whether glycemic control was a risk factor for cardiovascular disease; however, careful longer-term surveillance of the patient cohorts in the studies has recently borne fruit in this regard. Reports from both studies have shown that efforts to control glycemia early in the course of diabetes are rewarded many years later by a decreased risk of cardiovascular events and death.4,5 This is true even when excellent glycemic control achieved early on is not sustained indefinitely. It has also become widely recognized that the management of diabetes, with prevention of microvascular and cardiovascular disease as major aims, involves much more than a simple preoccupation with glycemic control—important as that is.

NEW TREATMENT OPTIONS

Concurrent with the DCCT and the UKPDS being conducted with, in effect, the therapeutic tools of the 1970s, considerable strides were being made in the development of new classes of antihyperglycemic agents for use in T2DM. These include the thiazolidinediones (TZDs), alpha-glucosidase inhibitors, nonsulfonylurea insulin secretagogues (also known as glinides), and, more recently, the incretin-based drugs that are the focus of this supplement to the Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine.

Understandable enthusiasm for tapping into the hitherto unexploited pathways and mechanisms targeted by a new drug class is inevitably tempered by known, or sometimes unforeseen, adverse effects. Some of the adverse effects typically associated with antihyperglycemic drugs used before the incretin-based therapies became available include hypoglycemia, weight gain, and fluid retention; all of these are perceived as possibly increasing the risk of the very thing we are striving to avoid in diabetes—cardiovascular morbidity and mortality. Such is the concern about this risk—epitomized, rightly or wrongly, in the controversial meta-analysis of clinical trials involving rosiglitazone6—that the US Food and Drug Administration now requires new antihyperglycemic drugs not only to meet efficacy standards for improving glycemia but also to show no sign of increased cardiovascular risk. The requirement must be met in preapproval trials, to be followed by postmarketing studies to prove the lack of cardiovascular risk.

As the contributions in this supplement point out, incretin-based therapies generally are either weight neutral or promote weight loss; by their modes of action, they are unlikely to cause hypoglycemia; and, as shown thus far, they are unassociated with fluid retention or increased likelihood of heart failure. Continued vigilance regarding cardiovascular risk will be important for the new incretin-based therapies, however.

 

 

BETA-CELL FUNCTION STILL A CHALLENGE

Another aspect of T2DM highlighted by the UKPDS is the degree of pancreatic beta-cell function loss—typically about 50% or more—at the time of clinical diagnosis, and the steady decline in function thereafter.7 This, as much as the understandable fatigue with lifestyle modification that normal humans experience, accounts for the frequent failure of oral antihyperglycemic monotherapy or dual therapy to maintain satisfactory glycemic control over the years. Relieving hyperglycemia at the time of diagnosis by any means usually leads to a temporary improvement in beta-cell function, but the possibility of slowing or even reversing the long-term decline has been an elusive therapeutic goal.

Although direct quantitative assessment of beta-cell function in humans is difficult in routine practice or outside of strict research protocols, a randomized study comparing different monotherapies for T2DM showed that over several years, the rise in HbA1c was more gradual with rosiglitazone than with glyburide or metformin; this suggests that, at least compared with metformin and sulfonylureas, the TZDs may have some longer-term benefit with respect to beta-cell function.8

That incretin-based treatments may help preserve or improve beta-cell function has been suggested by animal data.9 Proving that that is the case in humans will be much more challenging. A recent randomized study in patients with T2DM already taking metformin showed that addition of exenatide for 1 year resulted in improved beta-cell function, assessed by C-peptide responses to glucose and to arginine during a combined euglycemic-hyperinsulinemic and hyperglycemic clamp procedure. The improvement was evident compared with baseline function and with patients randomized to receive insulin glargine in addition to metformin for a year.10 However, 4 weeks after exenatide and glargine were discontinued, the beta-cell function had reverted to the pretreatment level and was not significantly different in the two groups of patients. Moreover, 3 months after treatment discontinuation, the HbA1c levels, which had decreased during the year to a similar extent in both groups, had returned to pretreatment levels. The investigators acknowledged that it was impossible in their study to “discriminate between acute and long-term effects of exenatide on beta-cell function.”10 So, in my opinion, the challenge remains to show that meaningful long-term effects on beta-cell function can be achieved with incretin-based therapy.

That said, there is no doubt that the incretin-based therapies bring a new dimension to our ability to treat diabetes. The articles in this supplement will provide both the specialist and nonspecialist with a better understanding of these relatively new therapies.

References
  1. The Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group. The effect of intensive treatment of diabetes on the development and progression of long-term complications in insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 1993; 329:977–986.
  2. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Intensive blood-glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). Lancet 1998; 352:837–853.
  3. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Effect of intensive blood-glucose control with metformin on complications in overweight patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 34). Lancet 1998; 352:854–865.
  4. Nathan DM, Cleary PA, Backlund JY, et al. Intensive diabetes treatment and cardiovascular disease in patients with type 1 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2005; 353:2643–2653.
  5. Holman RR, Paul SK, Bethel MA, Matthews DR, Neil HA. 10-year follow-up of intensive glucose control in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 359:1577–1589.
  6. Nissen SE, Wolski K. Effect of rosiglitazone on the risk of myocardial infarction and death from cardiovascular causes. N Engl J Med 2007; 356:2457–2471.
  7. UK Prospective Diabetes Study Group. UK prospective diabetes study 16: overview of 6 years’ therapy of type II diabetes: a progressive disease. Diabetes 1995; 44:1249–1258.
  8. Kahn SE, Haffner SM, Heise MA, et al. Glycemic durability of rosiglitazone, metformin, or glyburide monotherapy. N Engl J Med 2006; 355:2427–2443.
  9. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ. Biology of incretins: GLP-1 and GIP. Gastro­enterology 2007; 132:2131–2157.
  10. Bunck MC, Diamant M, Cornér A, et al. One-year treatment with exenatide improves beta-cell function, compared with insulin glargine, in metformin-treated type 2 diabetes patients: a randomized, controlled trial. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:762–768.
References
  1. The Diabetes Control and Complications Trial Research Group. The effect of intensive treatment of diabetes on the development and progression of long-term complications in insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 1993; 329:977–986.
  2. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Intensive blood-glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). Lancet 1998; 352:837–853.
  3. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Effect of intensive blood-glucose control with metformin on complications in overweight patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 34). Lancet 1998; 352:854–865.
  4. Nathan DM, Cleary PA, Backlund JY, et al. Intensive diabetes treatment and cardiovascular disease in patients with type 1 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2005; 353:2643–2653.
  5. Holman RR, Paul SK, Bethel MA, Matthews DR, Neil HA. 10-year follow-up of intensive glucose control in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 359:1577–1589.
  6. Nissen SE, Wolski K. Effect of rosiglitazone on the risk of myocardial infarction and death from cardiovascular causes. N Engl J Med 2007; 356:2457–2471.
  7. UK Prospective Diabetes Study Group. UK prospective diabetes study 16: overview of 6 years’ therapy of type II diabetes: a progressive disease. Diabetes 1995; 44:1249–1258.
  8. Kahn SE, Haffner SM, Heise MA, et al. Glycemic durability of rosiglitazone, metformin, or glyburide monotherapy. N Engl J Med 2006; 355:2427–2443.
  9. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ. Biology of incretins: GLP-1 and GIP. Gastro­enterology 2007; 132:2131–2157.
  10. Bunck MC, Diamant M, Cornér A, et al. One-year treatment with exenatide improves beta-cell function, compared with insulin glargine, in metformin-treated type 2 diabetes patients: a randomized, controlled trial. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:762–768.
Page Number
S2-S3
Page Number
S2-S3
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Incretin-based therapies for type 2 diabetes mellitus: New therapeutic mechanisms
Display Headline
Incretin-based therapies for type 2 diabetes mellitus: New therapeutic mechanisms
Citation Override
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine 2009 December;76(suppl 5):S2-S3
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 07:30
Un-Gate On Date
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 07:30
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 07:30
Article PDF Media

Current antihyperglycemic treatment strategies for patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 10/02/2018 - 11:44
Display Headline
Current antihyperglycemic treatment strategies for patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus

Data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention indicate that almost 24 million Americans, or 7.8% of the population, have diabetes; 90% to 95% of these have type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM).1 Diabetes and excessive weight often coexist. An analysis of data from the 1999–2002 National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) showed that among individuals with diabetes, 85% were overweight or obese and 55% were obese.2

Gaps remain in the management of T2DM between the goals for clinical parameters of care (eg, control of glucose, blood pressure [BP], and lipids) and actual clinical practice.3 NHANES data reveal that glycemic control improved from a mean glycosylated hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c) of 7.82% in 1999–2000 to 7.18% in 2003–2004.4 Hazard models based on the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) 10-year outcomes data in 4,320 newly diagnosed T2DM patients suggest that a sustained decrease in HbA1c of 0.511 percentage points could reduce diabetes complications by 10.7%.4,5

Additional analysis of NHANES data showed that in 2003–2004, about 57% of individuals achieved glycemic control, 48% reached BP targets, and 50% achieved target cholesterol goals.Only about 13% of diabetes patients achieved their target goals for all three parameters concurrently.6

This article reviews the association between cardiometabolic risk and the current antihyperglycemic treatments for patients with T2DM, with a focus on the role of incretin-related therapies.

THE IMPORTANCE OF CARDIOMETABOLIC RISK IN T2DM

Cardiovascular disease (CVD) is the leading cause of morbidity and mortality among people with diabetes and is the reported cause of mortality in up to 65% of deaths in persons with diabetes in the United States.7 The risk of CVD is two- to fourfold greater among adults with diabetes than among adults who do not have diabetes.8 The risk of CVD in patients with T2DM was evident in the UKPDS 17, where macrovascular complications, including CVD, were about twice as common as microvascular complications (20% vs 9%) after 9 years of follow-up.9 A study that involved more than 44,000 patients showed an almost double rate of mortality from all causes among individuals with T2DM compared with those with no diabetes (hazard ratio, 1.93; 95% confidence interval, 1.89 to 1.97).10 Current guidelines recommend aggressive management of CV risk factors, including BP control, correction of atherogenic dyslipidemia, glycemic control, weight reduction for those who are overweight or obese, and smoking cessation for those who smoke.3,11 Lifestyle interventions, including weight reduction and appropriately prescribed physical activity, result in reduced CV risk factors, which can help slow the progression of T2DM.12

GOALS OF T2DM THERAPY

Several studies have demonstrated that glycemic control can delay or prevent the development and progression of microvascular complications.13,14 UKPDS 33 showed that more intensive blood glucose control (median HbA1c 7.0%) in patients with T2DM followed over 10 years significantly (P = .029) reduced the risk for any diabetes-related end point by 12% compared with conventional therapy (median HbA1c 7.9%). Most of the risk reduction was accounted for by a 25% risk reduction in microvascular end points (P = .0099).13 Another report (UKPDS 35) demonstrated that HbA1c was strongly related to microvascular effects, with a 1% reduction in HbA1c associated with a 37% reduction in microvascular complications.14

Does intensive glucose control reduce CV risk?

To resolve the ongoing question of whether intensive glucose control can lead to a reduction in CV risk in patients with T2DM, three large, long-term trials were conducted within the last decade.15–18 Two of these, the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) and Action in Diabetes and Vascular Disease: Preterax and Diamicron Modified Release Controlled Evaluation (ADVANCE) trials, each enrolled more than 10,000 previously treated patients with long-standing T2DM. Patients were randomized to standard or intensive glycemic control for 3.5 years in the ACCORD trial and for 5 years in the ADVANCE trial.15,16

The ACCORD and ADVANCE trials, along with the smaller Veterans Administration Diabetes Trial (VADT) (N = 1,791), failed to show that more intensive glycemic control significantly reduced CVD.15–17 Additionally, the glycemic control component of ACCORD was halted because of increased mortality in the intensive arm compared with the standard arm.15 Further analyses of ACCORD data presented at the 69th Scientific Sessions of the American Diabetes Association (ADA) showed that HbA1c values lower than 7.0% did not explain the increased mortality. The 20% higher risk of death for every 1.0% increase in HbA1c greater than 6.0% suggests that glucose concentrations even lower than the general HbA1c goal of less than 7.0% may be appropriate in some patients.18 The most recent finding from VADT was that CV risk was dependent on disease duration and presence of comorbidities. Intensive therapy seemed to work best in patients with diabetes of less than 15 years’ duration, while risk of a CV event was more than doubled with intensive therapy in patients having diabetes for more than 21 years.

Clarification of treatment goals

A position statement of the ADA and a scientific statement of the American College of Cardiology Foundation and the American Heart Association19 concluded that the “evidence obtained from ACCORD, ADVANCE, and VADT does not suggest the need for major changes in glycemic control targets but, rather, additional clarification of the language that has consistently stressed individualization.” They state that while the general HbA1c goal of less than 7.0% seems reasonable, even lower HbA1c goals may be appropriate for some patients if they can be achieved without significant hypoglycemia or other adverse effects. Such patients might include those with diabetes of short duration, long life expectancy, or no significant CVD or hypoglycemia. Conversely, higher HbA1c goals may be appropriate for patients with limited life expectancy, a history of severe hypoglycemia, established microvascular or macrovascular complications, significant other comorbid conditions, or longstanding diabetes in whom an HbA1c of less than 7.0% has been difficult to attain despite optimal treatment and diabetes self-management education.19

 

 

Long-term risk reduction

A 10-year, postinterventional follow-up study (UKPDS 80) of the UKPDS survivor cohort was reported recently.20 Results showed that despite an early loss of glycemic differences between patients treated with diet and those treated with intensive regimens (sulfonylurea or insulin; metformin in overweight patients), the pharmacotherapy group demonstrated a prolonged reduction in microvascular risk as well as a significant reduction in the risk for myocardial infarction (15% [P = .01] in the sulfonylurea-insulin group and 33% [P = .005] in the metformin group) and death from any cause.20 This suggests that early improvement in glycemic control is associated with long-term benefits in the micro- and macrovascular health of patients with T2DM.

Additionally, the recent long-term follow-up of the Steno-2 study21 showed that a multifactorial intervention striving for intensive glucose, BP, and lipid control that included the use of renin-angiotensin system blockers, aspirin, and lipid-lowering agents not only reduced the risk of nonfatal CVD among patients with T2DM and microalbuminuria, but also had sustained beneficial effects on vascular complications and on rates of death from any cause and from CV causes. From a health care payer perspective, intensive multifactorial intervention was more likely to be cost-effective than conventional treatment in Denmark, especially if applied in a primary care setting.22

Comprehensive care needed

The lower-than-expected rates of CV outcomes in the ACCORD, ADVANCE, VADT, and Steno-2 studies reinforce the importance of comprehensive diabetes care that treats not only hyperglycemia but also elevated BP and dyslipidemia; these are considered the “ABCs” of diabetes.11,19 The 2009 ADA standards of medical care guidelines recommend that for most T2DM patients, HbA1c should be maintained at less than 7.0%,3 while the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE) 2007 guidelines state that HbA1c should be 6.5% or less.11 Both organizations stress the importance of individualized goals, as discussed above, and advocate BP goals of less than 130/80 mm Hg and dyslipidemia goals of low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) less than 100 mg/dL, high-density lipoprotein cholesterol (HDL-C) greater than 40 mg/dL for men and 50 mg/dL for women, and triglycerides less than 150 mg/dL. It is recommended that an optional LDL-C goal of less than 70 mg/dL be considered for individuals with overt CVD.

CURRENT ANTIHYPERGLYCEMIC TREATMENT STRATEGIES

In response to new insights from clinical research and emerging treatment strategies, disease-specific organizations and medical specialty societies regularly revise and update their treatment guidelines and algorithms. These resources recommend that glycemic progress should be regularly monitored and pharmacologic therapy titrated or new drugs added promptly if glycemic goals are not met after 2 to 3 months.

Several algorithms combine scientific evidence with expert clinical opinion to guide physicians in treating their patients with T2DM. The American College of Endocrinology (ACE)/AACE road maps are designed to help develop individualized treatment regimens to achieve an HbA1c of 6.5% or less.23 The algorithm from a writing group assembled by the ADA and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes (EASD) similarly promotes pharmacologic treatment together with lifestyle modifications to maintain a glycemic goal of HbA1c less than 7.0%.24

OVERVIEW OF ANTIHYPERGLYCEMIC TREATMENT APPROACHES

Lifestyle measures, medical nutrition therapy, and appropriately prescribed physical activity are recommended for virtually all patients with T2DM, as well as weight loss for those who are overweight or obese. Unfortunately, many patients cannot achieve glycemic goals with lifestyle measures alone and require the addition of pharmacotherapy.3 Extensive development of new therapies during the past 15 years has resulted in more than 11 classes of approved antihyperglycemic medications (Table 1) with diverse mechanisms of action and varied effects on HbA1c, body weight, lipids, and other factors.24–26

Initial oral therapy

T2DM is usually treated initially with a single oral agent. Consistent with the progressive nature of the disease, patients often eventually require one or more additional oral agents and in many cases insulin.13,27 Choice of specific agents is based on individual patient circumstances, including the need for weight loss and control of fasting versus postprandial glucose, the presence of dyslipidemia and hypertension, and the risk for and potential consequences of hypoglycemia.24 T2DM patients with severely uncontrolled and symptomatic hyperglycemia are best treated, at least initially, with a combination of insulin therapy and lifestyle intervention, often with metformin.

Metformin. The recently revised ADA/EASD writing group algorithm recommends that patients not requiring initial insulin begin treatment with metformin at the time of diagnosis unless there are contraindications.24 Metformin is not associated with hypoglycemia and is considered weight-neutral, although some patients may lose weight.28

Sulfonylureas. Sulfonylureas stimulate insulin secretion from pancreatic beta cells; their use may be associated with hypoglycemia and weight gain. Mechanisms for weight gain with sulfonylureas include reduction of glucosuria and increased caloric intake to prevent or treat hypoglycemia.11,28 Nateglinide and repaglinide are nonsulfonylurea oral insulin secretagogues. They result in rapid and relatively short-lived insulin responses and are usually administered three times a day, before each meal. Their use may be associated with weight gain and hypoglycemia.11

Thiazolidinediones. Thiazolidinediones (TZD) increase insulin sensitivity in muscle, adipose tissue, and the liver. Hypoglycemia is uncommon with TZD monotherapy but weight gain related to increased and redistributed adiposity and fluid retention frequently occurs.

Alpha-glucosidase inhibitors. The alpha-glucosidase inhibitors are administered before meals and primarily reduce postprandial hyperglycemia. They are generally weight-neutral.28

Insulin. Insulin and insulin analogues are the most effective antihyperglycemic agents, but their use can be associated with hypoglycemia and clinically significant weight gain.28

Colesevelam. Colesevelam is a bile acid sequestrant that was recently approved by the US Food and Drug Administration as an antihyperglycemic therapy in people with T2DM. At a dosage of 1.875 g BID or 3.75 g QD in combination with a sulfonylurea, metformin, or insulin therapy, reductions in HbA1c compared with placebo in clinical trials of colesevelam have ranged from ­–0.5% to –0.7% (P < .02). Frequency of hypoglycemia and weight gain is low with this agent.26

Weight management. Weight reduction is important for overweight or obese patients with T2DM.27,28 Even moderate weight loss (5% of body weight) can be associated with improved insulin action and reduced hyperglycemia.29 Conversely, weight gain has been shown to worsen hyperglycemia and other CV risk factors. Treatment-related weight gain can also lead to decreased regimen adherence, contributing to poor glycemic control.28

 

 

THE ROLE OF INCRETIN HORMONES AND INCRETIN-BASED THERAPIES IN T2DM PATIENTS

Over the last few years, the role of incretin hormones and their contribution to diabetes pathophysiology has become more apparent. The incretin effect refers to the observation that orally administered glucose elicits a greater insulin response than does glucose administered intravenously to produce equivalent blood glucose concentrations.30,31 The incretin effect is diminished in patients with T2DM.

Hormone mediation of the incretin effect

The two hormones that mediate the incretin effect are GIP (also known as gastric inhibitory polypeptide or glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide) and glucagon-like peptide−1 (GLP-1).30,31 GLP-1 has several glucoregulatory actions, including enhancement of endogenous insulin release and suppression of inappropriate glucagon secretion, both in a glucose-dependent manner. Therefore, these effects of GLP-1 occur only when glucose concentrations are elevated, thereby minimizing the risk of hypoglycemia. GLP-1 also regulates gastric emptying; infusions of GLP-1 can slow the accelerated emptying that is often present in T2DM patients. GLP-1 also increases satiety and decreases food intake via a central mechanism.31

Because GLP-1 is rapidly inactivated by the enzyme dipeptidyl peptidase–4 (DPP-4), therapeutic use of GLP-1 would require continuous infusion, which is impractical.30,31 Two strategies have been used to produce incretin-related therapies. One, inhibition of the DPP-4 enzyme, results in a two- to threefold enhancement of endogenous GLP-1. The other, involving agents that resist breakdown by DPP-4 but bind to and activate the GLP-1 receptor, produces glucoregulatory effects similar to those of GLP-1.30

Following subcutaneous (SC) injection, GLP-1 receptor agonists enhance insulin secretion and suppress inappropriately elevated glucagon, both in a glucose-dependent manner, as well as slow gastric emptying and enhance satiety.30 DPP-4 inhibitors provide glucose-dependent enhanced insulin secretion and glucagon suppression, but they do not have the same effects on gastric emptying or satiety.

Clinically, the GLP-1 receptor agonists improve glycemia and are associated with weight loss.32–35 Adverse gastrointestinal symptoms are relatively common during the first few weeks of treatment. DPP-4 inhibitors improve glycemia but are weight-neutral and are not generally associated with significant gastrointestinal symptoms.32,36–38

Incretin-based therapies

Incretin-based therapies are currently part of the antihyperglycemic armamentarium.25,32 The AACE guidelines11 and the ACE/AACE roadmaps23 include the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide and the DPP-4 inhibitor sitagliptin among antihyperglycemic therapies for patients with T2DM. The most recent update of the consensus algorithm statement of a joint ADA/EASD writing group included GLP-1 receptor agonists (but not DPP-4 inhibitors) in tier 2 of preferred agents, especially for patients who have concerns related to weight and hypoglycemia.24 They noted that DPP-4 inhibitors may be appropriate choices in selected patients.

DPP-4 inhibitors: sitagliptin, saxagliptin. Until recently, sitagliptin was the only DPP-4 inhibitor available in the United States. Sitagliptin is approved by the FDA for treatment of T2DM at a recommended oral dosage of 100 mg QD, either as monotherapy or in combination with other oral antihyperglycemic medications. The dosage of sitagliptin should be reduced to 50 mg/day in patients with creatinine clearance (CrCl) levels that are between 30 mL/min and 50 mL/min and to 25 mg/day in those with CrCl less than 30 mL/min.39

In a meta-analysis of incretin-based therapies, DPP-4 inhibitors produced a reduction in HbA1c compared with placebo (weighted mean difference of –0.74%; 95% confidence interval, –0.85% to –0.62%).32 DPP-4 inhibitor antihyperglycemic efficacy has been shown to be similar whether used as a monotherapy or add-on therapy.32,37,38 This same meta-analysis showed DPP-4 inhibitors as having a neutral effect on weight.32 More recently, a single-pill combination of metformin and sitagliptin was approved.40

A study comparing metformin, sitagliptin, and the combination of the two as initial monotherapy in T2DM patients with a baseline HbA1c of 8.8% showed 24-week HbA1c reductions from baseline of –0.66% with sitagliptin 100 mg QD, –0.82% with metformin 500 mg BID, and –1.90% with sitagliptin 50 mg + metformin 1,000 mg BID.41

On July 31, 2009, the FDA approved another DPP-4 inhibitor, saxagliptin, for the treatment of T2DM either as monotherapy or in combination with metformin, a sulfonylurea, or a TZD.42

GLP-1 receptor agonist: exenatide. Exenatide, the only FDA-approved GLP-1 receptor agonist, is the synthetic version of exendin-4, which binds to the human GLP-1 receptor and in vitro possesses many of the glucoregulatory effects of endogenous GLP-1.30,32 Exenatide is indicated as monotherapy or adjunctive therapy for patients with T2DM who have not achieved adequate glycemic control with metformin, a sulfonylurea, a TZD, or metformin in combination with a sulfonylurea or a TZD.43 Exenatide is administered by SC injection BID at a starting dosage of 5 mg BID for 4 weeks, followed by an increase to 10 mg BID.

Exenatide has been shown not only to enhance glucose-dependent insulin secretion but also to restore impaired first-phase insulin response in subjects with T2DM. Exenatide also helps control postprandial glycemic excursions by suppressing inappropriate glucagon secretion, slowing accelerated gastric emptying, and enhancing satiety. The increased satiety results in decreased food intake and weight loss.31,44 In a recent head-to-head crossover study, exenatide was shown to be more effective than sitagliptin in lowering postprandial glucose concentrations, increasing insulin secretion, and reducing postprandial glucagon secretion.45 Exenatide also slowed gastric emptying and reduced caloric intake.

Exenatide, in most studies, resulted in a placebo-subtracted HbA1c reduction of approximately –1.0% and in one study lowered HbA1c from baseline by –1.5%. Completer analyses have shown HbA1c reductions of –1.0% up to 3 years and –0.8% up to 3.5 years. Exenatide has also been associated with a mean weight loss of as much as –3.6 kg at 30 weeks and as much as –5.3 kg at 3.5 years.33–35,46,47 A 1-year study showed that exenatide improved beta-cell secretory function compared with insulin glargine in metformin-treated patients with T2DM.48 Long-term data, including findings from completed and intention-to-treat analyses of 82 weeks49 to at least 3 years47 have demonstrated that exenatide improved CV risk factors, including those related to BP, lipids, and hepatic injury biomarkers.

Therapies in development

Incretin-based therapies in development include a novel once-weekly formulation of exenatide; taspoglutide, another once-weekly GLP-1 receptor agonist; and liraglutide, a GLP-1 receptor agonist that is administered once daily.50 Liraglutide is currently being evaluated in clinical trials as a once-daily SC injection.51–53 Liraglutide has been reported to reduce HbA1c by –1.1% at 26 weeks and up to –1.14% at 52 weeks and result in weight loss (up to –2.8 kg at 26 weeks and up to –2.5 kg at 52 weeks) in patients with T2DM who are treatment-naïve or taking other antidiabetes agents, including metformin, sulfonylurea, and TZD.51–53 Evaluation of the once-weekly formulation of exenatide showed reductions in HbA1c of –1.9% at 30 weeks and –2.0% at 52 weeks with a weight loss of –3.7 kg at 30 weeks and –4.1 kg over 52 weeks of treatment.46,54

CONCLUSION

In the United States, the epidemics of excessive weight and T2DM have contributed to an increased medical risk for many individuals. Comprehensive diabetes treatments targeting not only hyperglycemia but also frequently associated overweight/obesity, hypertension, and dyslipidemia will be required to reduce such risk. Current treatment strategies have evolved based on updated clinical guidelines and trials, as well as practice experience, including those related to newer agents. Incretin-based therapies, such as the GLP-1 receptor agonist, exenatide, and the DPP-4 inhibitors, sitagliptin and saxagliptin, are important additions to the treatment armamentarium, offering a reduction in hyperglycemia and beneficial effects on weight (reduction with exenatide and neutral with sitagliptin), and have been shown to improve several CV risk factors.

References
  1. National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases. National Diabetes Statistics, 2007 fact sheet. Bethesda, MD: US Department of Health and Human Services, National Institutes of Health, 2008. Available at: http://www.diabetes.niddk.nih.gov/dm/pubs/statistics/index.htm. Accessed September 16, 2009.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Prevalence of overweight and obesity among adults with diagnosed diabetes: United States, 1988–1994 and 1999–2002. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2004; 53:1066–1068.
  3. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes: 2009. Diabetes Care 2009; 32(suppl 1):S13–S61.
  4. Hoerger TJ, Segel JE, Gregg EW, Saaddine JB. Is glycemic control improving in U.S. adults? Diabetes Care 2008; 31:81–86.
  5. Stratton IM, Cull CA, Adler AI, Matthews DR, Neil HA, Holman RR. Additive effects of glycaemia and blood pressure exposure on risk of complications in type 2 diabetes: a prospective observational study (UKPDS 75). Diabetologia 2006; 49:1761–1769.
  6. Ong KL, Cheung BM, Wong LY, Wat NM, Tan KC, Lam KS. Prevalence, treatment, and control of diagnosed diabetes in the U.S. National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey 1999–2004. Ann Epidemiol 2008; 18:222–229.
  7. Engelgau MM, Geiss LS, Saaddine JB, et al. The evolving diabetes burden in the United States. Ann Intern Med 2004; 140:945–950.
  8. Fox CS, Coady S, Sorlie PD, et al. Trends in cardiovascular complications of diabetes. JAMA 2004; 292:2495–2499.
  9. Turner R, Cull C, Holman R. United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study 17: a 9-year update of a randomized, controlled trial on the effect of improved metabolic control on complications in noninsulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. Ann Intern Med 1996; 124(1 Pt 2):136–145.
  10. Mulnier HE, Seaman HE, Raleigh VS, Soedamah-Muthu SS, Colhoun HM, Lawrenson RA. Mortality in people with type 2 diabetes in the UK. Diabet Med 2006; 23:516–521.
  11. AACE Diabetes Mellitus Clinical Practice Guidelines Task Force. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists medical guidelines for clinical practice for the management of diabetes mellitus. Endocr Pract 2007; 13(suppl 1):S4–S68.
  12. American Diabetes Association. Nutrition recommendations and interventions for diabetes: a position statement of the American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 2008; 31(suppl 1):S61−S78.
  13. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Intensive blood-glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). Lancet 1998; 352:837–853.
  14. Stratton IM, Adler AI, Neil HA, et al. Association of glycaemia with macrovascular and microvascular complications of type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 35): prospective observational study. BMJ 2000; 321:405–412.
  15. The Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes Study Group. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545–2559.
  16. The ADVANCE Collaborative Group. Intensive blood glucose control and vascular outcomes in patients with type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2560–2572.
  17. Duckworth W, Abraira C, Moritz T, et al; for the VADT Investigators. Glucose control and vascular complications in veterans with type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2009; 360:129–139.
  18. Kerr M. ADA 2009: intensive glycemic control not directly linked to excess cardiovascular risk. Medscape Medical News Web site. http://www.medscape.com/viewarticle/704260_print. Published June 11, 2009. Accessed September 16, 2009.
  19. Skyler JS, Bergenstal R, Bonow RO, et al. Intensive glycemic control and the prevention of cardiovascular events: implications of the ACCORD, ADVANCE, and VA diabetes trials: a position statement of the American Diabetes Association and a scientific statement of the American College of Cardiology Foundation and the American Heart Association. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:187–192.
  20. Holman RR, Paul SK, Bethel MA, Matthews DR, Neil HA. 10-year follow-up of intensive glucose control in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 359:1577–1589.
  21. Gaede P, Lund-Andersen H, Parving HH, Pedersen O. Effect of a multifactorial intervention on mortality in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:580–591.
  22. Gaede P, Valentine WJ, Palmer AJ, et al. Cost-effectiveness of intensified versus conventional multifactorial intervention in type 2 diabetes: results and projections from the Steno-2 study. Diabetes Care 2008; 31:1510–1515.
  23. ACE/AACE Diabetes Road Map Task Force. Road maps to achieve glycemic control in type 2 diabetes mellitus. Endocr Pract 2007; 13:260–268.
  24. Nathan DM, Buse JB, Davidson MB, et al. Medical management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes: a consensus algorithm for the initiation and adjustment of therapy: a consensus statement of the American Diabetes Association and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:193–203.
  25. Alexander GC, Sehgal NL, Moloney RM, Stafford RS. National trends in treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus, 1994–2007. Arch Intern Med 2008; 168:2088–2094.
  26. Sonnett TE, Levien TL, Neumiller JJ, Gates BJ, Setter SM. Colesevelam hydrochloride for the treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus. Clin Ther 2009; 31:245–259.
  27. DeFronzo RA. Pharmacologic therapy for type 2 diabetes mellitus. Ann Intern Med 1999; 131:281–303.
  28. Purnell JQ, Weyer C. Weight effect of current and experimental drugs for diabetes mellitus: from promotion to alleviation of obesity. Treat Endocrinol 2003; 2:33–47.
  29. Klein S, Sheard NF, Pi-Sunyer X, et al. Weight management through lifestyle modification for the prevention and management of type 2 diabetes: rationale and strategies: a statement of the American Diabetes Association, the North American Association for the Study of Obesity, and the American Society for Clinical Nutrition. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2067–2073.
  30. Stonehouse A, Okerson T, Kendall D, Maggs D. Emerging incretin based therapies for type 2 diabetes: incretin mimetics and DPP-4 inhibitors. Curr Diabetes Rev 2008; 4:101–109.
  31. Drucker DJ. The biology of incretin hormones. Cell Metab 2006; 3:153–165.
  32. Amori RE, Lau J, Pittas AG. Efficacy and safety of incretin therapy in type 2 diabetes: systematic review and meta-analysis. JAMA 2007; 298:194–206.
  33. Buse JB, Henry RR, Han J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in sulfonylurea-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2628–2635.
  34. DeFronzo RA, Ratner RE, Han J, Kim DD, Fineman MS, Baron AD. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control and weight over 30 weeks in metformin-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1092–1100.
  35. Kendall DM, Riddle MC, Rosenstock J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes treated with metformin and a sulfonylurea. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1083–1091.
  36. Aschner P, Kipnes MS, Lunceford JK, et al. Effect of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy on glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2632−2637.
  37. Charbonnel B, Karasik A, Liu J, Wu M, Meininger G, for the Sitagliptin Study 020 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin added to ongoing metformin therapy in patients with type 2 diabetes inadequately controlled with metformin alone. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2638–2643.
  38. Scott R, Wu M, Sanchez M, Stein P. Efficacy and tolerability of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy over 12 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes. Int J Clin Pract 2007; 61:171–180.
  39. Januvia. Physicians’ Desk Reference. 63rd edition. Montvale, NJ: Physicians’ Desk Reference Inc; 2008:2048–2054.
  40. Janumet. Physicians’ Desk Reference. 63rd edition. Montvale, NJ: Physicians’ Desk Reference Inc; 2008:2041–2048.
  41. Goldstein BJ, Feinglos MN, Lunceford JK, Johnson J, Williams-Herman DE, for the Sitagliptin 036 Study Group. Effect of initial combination therapy with sitagliptin, a dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor, and metformin on glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2007; 30:1979–1987.
  42. US Department of Health and Human Services. FDA approves new drug treatment for type 2 diabetes. US Food and Drug Administration Web site. http://www.fda.gov/newsevents/newsroom/pressannouncements/ucm174780.htm. Published July 31, 2009. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  43. Byetta [package insert]. San Diego, CA: Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc.; 2009.
  44. Edwards CM, Stanley SA, Davis R, et al. Exendin-4 reduces fasting and postprandial glucose and decreases energy intake in healthy volunteers. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 2001; 281:E155–E161.
  45. DeFronzo RA, Okerson T, Viswanathan P, Guan X, Holcombe JH, MacConell L. Effects of exenatide versus sitagliptin on postprandial glucose, insulin and glucagon secretion, gastric emptying, and caloric intake: a randomized, cross-over study. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:2943–2952.
  46. Drucker DJ, Buse JB, Taylor K, et al. Exenatide once weekly versus twice daily for the treatment of type 2 diabetes: a randomised, open-label, non-inferiority study. Lancet 2008; 372:1240–1250.
  47. Klonoff DC, Buse JB, Nielsen LL, et al. Exenatide effects on diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular risk factors and hepatic biomarkers in patients with type 2 diabetes treated for at least 3 years. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:275–286.
  48. Bunck MC, Diamant M, Cornér A, et al. One-year treatment with exenatide improves beta-cell function, compared with insulin glargine, in metformin-treated type 2 diabetic patients: a randomized, controlled trial. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:762–768.
  49. Blonde L, Klein EJ, Han J, et al. Interim analysis of the effects of exenatide treatment on A1C, weight and cardiovascular risk factors over 82 weeks in 314 overweight patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Obes Metab 2006; 8:436–447.
  50. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ, Maida A, Lamont BJ. ADA 2008: incretin-based therapeutics. MedscapeCME Web site. http://www.medscape.com/viewprogram/15786. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  51. Garber A, Henry R, Ratner R, et al. Liraglutide versus glimepiride monotherapy for type 2 diabetes (LEAD-3 Mono): a randomised, 52-week, phase III, double-blind, parallel-treatment trial. Lancet 2009; 373:473–481.
  52. Nauck M, Frid A, Hermansen K, et al. Efficacy and safety comparison of liraglutide, glimepiride, and placebo, all in combination with metformin, in type 2 diabetes: the LEAD (liraglutide effect and action in diabetes)-2 study. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:84–90.
  53. Marre M, Shaw J, Brändle M, et al. Liraglutide, a once-daily human GLP-1 analogue, added to a sulphonylurea over 26 weeks produces greater improvements in glycaemic and weight control compared with adding rosiglitazone or placebo in subjects with type 2 diabetes (LEAD-1 SU). Diabet Med 2009; 26:268–278.
  54. Bergenstal RM, Kim T, Trautmann M, Zhuang D, Okerson T, Taylor K. Exenatide once weekly elicited improvements in blood pressure and lipid profile over 52 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes. Circulation 2008; 118:S1086. Abstract 1239.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Lawrence Blonde, MD
Director, Ochsner Diabetes Clinical Research Unit, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, and Associate Internal Medicine Residency Program Director, Ochsner Medical Center, New Orleans, LA

Correspondence: Lawrence Blonde, MD, FACP, FACE, Director, Ochsner Diabetes Clinical Research Unit, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, Ochsner Medical Center, 1514 Jefferson Hwy., New Orleans, LA 70121; [email protected]

Dr. Blonde reported that he has received research and grant support from Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH, Eli Lilly and Company, F. Hoffmann-LaRoche Ltd., MannKind Corporation, Merck & Co., Inc., Novartis, Novo Nordisk, Pfizer Inc., and Sanofi-Aventis; and honoraria for speaking/consulting from Abbott Laboratories, Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., AstraZeneca, Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH, Bristol-Myers Squibb, Daiichi Sankyo Co., Ltd., Eli Lilly and Company, GlaxoSmithKline, Halozyme Therapeutics, LifeScan, Inc., MannKind Corporation, Merck & Co., Inc., Novartis, Novo Nordisk, Pfizer Inc., and Sanofi-Aventis. Dr. Blonde also reported that his spouse is a stock shareholder of Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., and Pfizer Inc. in an account that is not part of their community property. Dr. Blonde reported that he did not receive an honorarium for writing this article.

Dr. Blonde reported that he wrote this article and received no assistance with content development from unnamed contributors. He reported that BlueSpark Healthcare Communications, a medical communications company, assisted with reference verification, proofing for grammar and style, table and figure rendering based on author instructions, copyright permission requests, and identification of topical overlap with other articles in this supplement.

Publications
Page Number
S4-S11
Author and Disclosure Information

Lawrence Blonde, MD
Director, Ochsner Diabetes Clinical Research Unit, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, and Associate Internal Medicine Residency Program Director, Ochsner Medical Center, New Orleans, LA

Correspondence: Lawrence Blonde, MD, FACP, FACE, Director, Ochsner Diabetes Clinical Research Unit, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, Ochsner Medical Center, 1514 Jefferson Hwy., New Orleans, LA 70121; [email protected]

Dr. Blonde reported that he has received research and grant support from Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH, Eli Lilly and Company, F. Hoffmann-LaRoche Ltd., MannKind Corporation, Merck & Co., Inc., Novartis, Novo Nordisk, Pfizer Inc., and Sanofi-Aventis; and honoraria for speaking/consulting from Abbott Laboratories, Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., AstraZeneca, Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH, Bristol-Myers Squibb, Daiichi Sankyo Co., Ltd., Eli Lilly and Company, GlaxoSmithKline, Halozyme Therapeutics, LifeScan, Inc., MannKind Corporation, Merck & Co., Inc., Novartis, Novo Nordisk, Pfizer Inc., and Sanofi-Aventis. Dr. Blonde also reported that his spouse is a stock shareholder of Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., and Pfizer Inc. in an account that is not part of their community property. Dr. Blonde reported that he did not receive an honorarium for writing this article.

Dr. Blonde reported that he wrote this article and received no assistance with content development from unnamed contributors. He reported that BlueSpark Healthcare Communications, a medical communications company, assisted with reference verification, proofing for grammar and style, table and figure rendering based on author instructions, copyright permission requests, and identification of topical overlap with other articles in this supplement.

Author and Disclosure Information

Lawrence Blonde, MD
Director, Ochsner Diabetes Clinical Research Unit, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, and Associate Internal Medicine Residency Program Director, Ochsner Medical Center, New Orleans, LA

Correspondence: Lawrence Blonde, MD, FACP, FACE, Director, Ochsner Diabetes Clinical Research Unit, Department of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, Ochsner Medical Center, 1514 Jefferson Hwy., New Orleans, LA 70121; [email protected]

Dr. Blonde reported that he has received research and grant support from Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH, Eli Lilly and Company, F. Hoffmann-LaRoche Ltd., MannKind Corporation, Merck & Co., Inc., Novartis, Novo Nordisk, Pfizer Inc., and Sanofi-Aventis; and honoraria for speaking/consulting from Abbott Laboratories, Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., AstraZeneca, Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH, Bristol-Myers Squibb, Daiichi Sankyo Co., Ltd., Eli Lilly and Company, GlaxoSmithKline, Halozyme Therapeutics, LifeScan, Inc., MannKind Corporation, Merck & Co., Inc., Novartis, Novo Nordisk, Pfizer Inc., and Sanofi-Aventis. Dr. Blonde also reported that his spouse is a stock shareholder of Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc., and Pfizer Inc. in an account that is not part of their community property. Dr. Blonde reported that he did not receive an honorarium for writing this article.

Dr. Blonde reported that he wrote this article and received no assistance with content development from unnamed contributors. He reported that BlueSpark Healthcare Communications, a medical communications company, assisted with reference verification, proofing for grammar and style, table and figure rendering based on author instructions, copyright permission requests, and identification of topical overlap with other articles in this supplement.

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention indicate that almost 24 million Americans, or 7.8% of the population, have diabetes; 90% to 95% of these have type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM).1 Diabetes and excessive weight often coexist. An analysis of data from the 1999–2002 National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) showed that among individuals with diabetes, 85% were overweight or obese and 55% were obese.2

Gaps remain in the management of T2DM between the goals for clinical parameters of care (eg, control of glucose, blood pressure [BP], and lipids) and actual clinical practice.3 NHANES data reveal that glycemic control improved from a mean glycosylated hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c) of 7.82% in 1999–2000 to 7.18% in 2003–2004.4 Hazard models based on the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) 10-year outcomes data in 4,320 newly diagnosed T2DM patients suggest that a sustained decrease in HbA1c of 0.511 percentage points could reduce diabetes complications by 10.7%.4,5

Additional analysis of NHANES data showed that in 2003–2004, about 57% of individuals achieved glycemic control, 48% reached BP targets, and 50% achieved target cholesterol goals.Only about 13% of diabetes patients achieved their target goals for all three parameters concurrently.6

This article reviews the association between cardiometabolic risk and the current antihyperglycemic treatments for patients with T2DM, with a focus on the role of incretin-related therapies.

THE IMPORTANCE OF CARDIOMETABOLIC RISK IN T2DM

Cardiovascular disease (CVD) is the leading cause of morbidity and mortality among people with diabetes and is the reported cause of mortality in up to 65% of deaths in persons with diabetes in the United States.7 The risk of CVD is two- to fourfold greater among adults with diabetes than among adults who do not have diabetes.8 The risk of CVD in patients with T2DM was evident in the UKPDS 17, where macrovascular complications, including CVD, were about twice as common as microvascular complications (20% vs 9%) after 9 years of follow-up.9 A study that involved more than 44,000 patients showed an almost double rate of mortality from all causes among individuals with T2DM compared with those with no diabetes (hazard ratio, 1.93; 95% confidence interval, 1.89 to 1.97).10 Current guidelines recommend aggressive management of CV risk factors, including BP control, correction of atherogenic dyslipidemia, glycemic control, weight reduction for those who are overweight or obese, and smoking cessation for those who smoke.3,11 Lifestyle interventions, including weight reduction and appropriately prescribed physical activity, result in reduced CV risk factors, which can help slow the progression of T2DM.12

GOALS OF T2DM THERAPY

Several studies have demonstrated that glycemic control can delay or prevent the development and progression of microvascular complications.13,14 UKPDS 33 showed that more intensive blood glucose control (median HbA1c 7.0%) in patients with T2DM followed over 10 years significantly (P = .029) reduced the risk for any diabetes-related end point by 12% compared with conventional therapy (median HbA1c 7.9%). Most of the risk reduction was accounted for by a 25% risk reduction in microvascular end points (P = .0099).13 Another report (UKPDS 35) demonstrated that HbA1c was strongly related to microvascular effects, with a 1% reduction in HbA1c associated with a 37% reduction in microvascular complications.14

Does intensive glucose control reduce CV risk?

To resolve the ongoing question of whether intensive glucose control can lead to a reduction in CV risk in patients with T2DM, three large, long-term trials were conducted within the last decade.15–18 Two of these, the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) and Action in Diabetes and Vascular Disease: Preterax and Diamicron Modified Release Controlled Evaluation (ADVANCE) trials, each enrolled more than 10,000 previously treated patients with long-standing T2DM. Patients were randomized to standard or intensive glycemic control for 3.5 years in the ACCORD trial and for 5 years in the ADVANCE trial.15,16

The ACCORD and ADVANCE trials, along with the smaller Veterans Administration Diabetes Trial (VADT) (N = 1,791), failed to show that more intensive glycemic control significantly reduced CVD.15–17 Additionally, the glycemic control component of ACCORD was halted because of increased mortality in the intensive arm compared with the standard arm.15 Further analyses of ACCORD data presented at the 69th Scientific Sessions of the American Diabetes Association (ADA) showed that HbA1c values lower than 7.0% did not explain the increased mortality. The 20% higher risk of death for every 1.0% increase in HbA1c greater than 6.0% suggests that glucose concentrations even lower than the general HbA1c goal of less than 7.0% may be appropriate in some patients.18 The most recent finding from VADT was that CV risk was dependent on disease duration and presence of comorbidities. Intensive therapy seemed to work best in patients with diabetes of less than 15 years’ duration, while risk of a CV event was more than doubled with intensive therapy in patients having diabetes for more than 21 years.

Clarification of treatment goals

A position statement of the ADA and a scientific statement of the American College of Cardiology Foundation and the American Heart Association19 concluded that the “evidence obtained from ACCORD, ADVANCE, and VADT does not suggest the need for major changes in glycemic control targets but, rather, additional clarification of the language that has consistently stressed individualization.” They state that while the general HbA1c goal of less than 7.0% seems reasonable, even lower HbA1c goals may be appropriate for some patients if they can be achieved without significant hypoglycemia or other adverse effects. Such patients might include those with diabetes of short duration, long life expectancy, or no significant CVD or hypoglycemia. Conversely, higher HbA1c goals may be appropriate for patients with limited life expectancy, a history of severe hypoglycemia, established microvascular or macrovascular complications, significant other comorbid conditions, or longstanding diabetes in whom an HbA1c of less than 7.0% has been difficult to attain despite optimal treatment and diabetes self-management education.19

 

 

Long-term risk reduction

A 10-year, postinterventional follow-up study (UKPDS 80) of the UKPDS survivor cohort was reported recently.20 Results showed that despite an early loss of glycemic differences between patients treated with diet and those treated with intensive regimens (sulfonylurea or insulin; metformin in overweight patients), the pharmacotherapy group demonstrated a prolonged reduction in microvascular risk as well as a significant reduction in the risk for myocardial infarction (15% [P = .01] in the sulfonylurea-insulin group and 33% [P = .005] in the metformin group) and death from any cause.20 This suggests that early improvement in glycemic control is associated with long-term benefits in the micro- and macrovascular health of patients with T2DM.

Additionally, the recent long-term follow-up of the Steno-2 study21 showed that a multifactorial intervention striving for intensive glucose, BP, and lipid control that included the use of renin-angiotensin system blockers, aspirin, and lipid-lowering agents not only reduced the risk of nonfatal CVD among patients with T2DM and microalbuminuria, but also had sustained beneficial effects on vascular complications and on rates of death from any cause and from CV causes. From a health care payer perspective, intensive multifactorial intervention was more likely to be cost-effective than conventional treatment in Denmark, especially if applied in a primary care setting.22

Comprehensive care needed

The lower-than-expected rates of CV outcomes in the ACCORD, ADVANCE, VADT, and Steno-2 studies reinforce the importance of comprehensive diabetes care that treats not only hyperglycemia but also elevated BP and dyslipidemia; these are considered the “ABCs” of diabetes.11,19 The 2009 ADA standards of medical care guidelines recommend that for most T2DM patients, HbA1c should be maintained at less than 7.0%,3 while the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE) 2007 guidelines state that HbA1c should be 6.5% or less.11 Both organizations stress the importance of individualized goals, as discussed above, and advocate BP goals of less than 130/80 mm Hg and dyslipidemia goals of low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) less than 100 mg/dL, high-density lipoprotein cholesterol (HDL-C) greater than 40 mg/dL for men and 50 mg/dL for women, and triglycerides less than 150 mg/dL. It is recommended that an optional LDL-C goal of less than 70 mg/dL be considered for individuals with overt CVD.

CURRENT ANTIHYPERGLYCEMIC TREATMENT STRATEGIES

In response to new insights from clinical research and emerging treatment strategies, disease-specific organizations and medical specialty societies regularly revise and update their treatment guidelines and algorithms. These resources recommend that glycemic progress should be regularly monitored and pharmacologic therapy titrated or new drugs added promptly if glycemic goals are not met after 2 to 3 months.

Several algorithms combine scientific evidence with expert clinical opinion to guide physicians in treating their patients with T2DM. The American College of Endocrinology (ACE)/AACE road maps are designed to help develop individualized treatment regimens to achieve an HbA1c of 6.5% or less.23 The algorithm from a writing group assembled by the ADA and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes (EASD) similarly promotes pharmacologic treatment together with lifestyle modifications to maintain a glycemic goal of HbA1c less than 7.0%.24

OVERVIEW OF ANTIHYPERGLYCEMIC TREATMENT APPROACHES

Lifestyle measures, medical nutrition therapy, and appropriately prescribed physical activity are recommended for virtually all patients with T2DM, as well as weight loss for those who are overweight or obese. Unfortunately, many patients cannot achieve glycemic goals with lifestyle measures alone and require the addition of pharmacotherapy.3 Extensive development of new therapies during the past 15 years has resulted in more than 11 classes of approved antihyperglycemic medications (Table 1) with diverse mechanisms of action and varied effects on HbA1c, body weight, lipids, and other factors.24–26

Initial oral therapy

T2DM is usually treated initially with a single oral agent. Consistent with the progressive nature of the disease, patients often eventually require one or more additional oral agents and in many cases insulin.13,27 Choice of specific agents is based on individual patient circumstances, including the need for weight loss and control of fasting versus postprandial glucose, the presence of dyslipidemia and hypertension, and the risk for and potential consequences of hypoglycemia.24 T2DM patients with severely uncontrolled and symptomatic hyperglycemia are best treated, at least initially, with a combination of insulin therapy and lifestyle intervention, often with metformin.

Metformin. The recently revised ADA/EASD writing group algorithm recommends that patients not requiring initial insulin begin treatment with metformin at the time of diagnosis unless there are contraindications.24 Metformin is not associated with hypoglycemia and is considered weight-neutral, although some patients may lose weight.28

Sulfonylureas. Sulfonylureas stimulate insulin secretion from pancreatic beta cells; their use may be associated with hypoglycemia and weight gain. Mechanisms for weight gain with sulfonylureas include reduction of glucosuria and increased caloric intake to prevent or treat hypoglycemia.11,28 Nateglinide and repaglinide are nonsulfonylurea oral insulin secretagogues. They result in rapid and relatively short-lived insulin responses and are usually administered three times a day, before each meal. Their use may be associated with weight gain and hypoglycemia.11

Thiazolidinediones. Thiazolidinediones (TZD) increase insulin sensitivity in muscle, adipose tissue, and the liver. Hypoglycemia is uncommon with TZD monotherapy but weight gain related to increased and redistributed adiposity and fluid retention frequently occurs.

Alpha-glucosidase inhibitors. The alpha-glucosidase inhibitors are administered before meals and primarily reduce postprandial hyperglycemia. They are generally weight-neutral.28

Insulin. Insulin and insulin analogues are the most effective antihyperglycemic agents, but their use can be associated with hypoglycemia and clinically significant weight gain.28

Colesevelam. Colesevelam is a bile acid sequestrant that was recently approved by the US Food and Drug Administration as an antihyperglycemic therapy in people with T2DM. At a dosage of 1.875 g BID or 3.75 g QD in combination with a sulfonylurea, metformin, or insulin therapy, reductions in HbA1c compared with placebo in clinical trials of colesevelam have ranged from ­–0.5% to –0.7% (P < .02). Frequency of hypoglycemia and weight gain is low with this agent.26

Weight management. Weight reduction is important for overweight or obese patients with T2DM.27,28 Even moderate weight loss (5% of body weight) can be associated with improved insulin action and reduced hyperglycemia.29 Conversely, weight gain has been shown to worsen hyperglycemia and other CV risk factors. Treatment-related weight gain can also lead to decreased regimen adherence, contributing to poor glycemic control.28

 

 

THE ROLE OF INCRETIN HORMONES AND INCRETIN-BASED THERAPIES IN T2DM PATIENTS

Over the last few years, the role of incretin hormones and their contribution to diabetes pathophysiology has become more apparent. The incretin effect refers to the observation that orally administered glucose elicits a greater insulin response than does glucose administered intravenously to produce equivalent blood glucose concentrations.30,31 The incretin effect is diminished in patients with T2DM.

Hormone mediation of the incretin effect

The two hormones that mediate the incretin effect are GIP (also known as gastric inhibitory polypeptide or glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide) and glucagon-like peptide−1 (GLP-1).30,31 GLP-1 has several glucoregulatory actions, including enhancement of endogenous insulin release and suppression of inappropriate glucagon secretion, both in a glucose-dependent manner. Therefore, these effects of GLP-1 occur only when glucose concentrations are elevated, thereby minimizing the risk of hypoglycemia. GLP-1 also regulates gastric emptying; infusions of GLP-1 can slow the accelerated emptying that is often present in T2DM patients. GLP-1 also increases satiety and decreases food intake via a central mechanism.31

Because GLP-1 is rapidly inactivated by the enzyme dipeptidyl peptidase–4 (DPP-4), therapeutic use of GLP-1 would require continuous infusion, which is impractical.30,31 Two strategies have been used to produce incretin-related therapies. One, inhibition of the DPP-4 enzyme, results in a two- to threefold enhancement of endogenous GLP-1. The other, involving agents that resist breakdown by DPP-4 but bind to and activate the GLP-1 receptor, produces glucoregulatory effects similar to those of GLP-1.30

Following subcutaneous (SC) injection, GLP-1 receptor agonists enhance insulin secretion and suppress inappropriately elevated glucagon, both in a glucose-dependent manner, as well as slow gastric emptying and enhance satiety.30 DPP-4 inhibitors provide glucose-dependent enhanced insulin secretion and glucagon suppression, but they do not have the same effects on gastric emptying or satiety.

Clinically, the GLP-1 receptor agonists improve glycemia and are associated with weight loss.32–35 Adverse gastrointestinal symptoms are relatively common during the first few weeks of treatment. DPP-4 inhibitors improve glycemia but are weight-neutral and are not generally associated with significant gastrointestinal symptoms.32,36–38

Incretin-based therapies

Incretin-based therapies are currently part of the antihyperglycemic armamentarium.25,32 The AACE guidelines11 and the ACE/AACE roadmaps23 include the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide and the DPP-4 inhibitor sitagliptin among antihyperglycemic therapies for patients with T2DM. The most recent update of the consensus algorithm statement of a joint ADA/EASD writing group included GLP-1 receptor agonists (but not DPP-4 inhibitors) in tier 2 of preferred agents, especially for patients who have concerns related to weight and hypoglycemia.24 They noted that DPP-4 inhibitors may be appropriate choices in selected patients.

DPP-4 inhibitors: sitagliptin, saxagliptin. Until recently, sitagliptin was the only DPP-4 inhibitor available in the United States. Sitagliptin is approved by the FDA for treatment of T2DM at a recommended oral dosage of 100 mg QD, either as monotherapy or in combination with other oral antihyperglycemic medications. The dosage of sitagliptin should be reduced to 50 mg/day in patients with creatinine clearance (CrCl) levels that are between 30 mL/min and 50 mL/min and to 25 mg/day in those with CrCl less than 30 mL/min.39

In a meta-analysis of incretin-based therapies, DPP-4 inhibitors produced a reduction in HbA1c compared with placebo (weighted mean difference of –0.74%; 95% confidence interval, –0.85% to –0.62%).32 DPP-4 inhibitor antihyperglycemic efficacy has been shown to be similar whether used as a monotherapy or add-on therapy.32,37,38 This same meta-analysis showed DPP-4 inhibitors as having a neutral effect on weight.32 More recently, a single-pill combination of metformin and sitagliptin was approved.40

A study comparing metformin, sitagliptin, and the combination of the two as initial monotherapy in T2DM patients with a baseline HbA1c of 8.8% showed 24-week HbA1c reductions from baseline of –0.66% with sitagliptin 100 mg QD, –0.82% with metformin 500 mg BID, and –1.90% with sitagliptin 50 mg + metformin 1,000 mg BID.41

On July 31, 2009, the FDA approved another DPP-4 inhibitor, saxagliptin, for the treatment of T2DM either as monotherapy or in combination with metformin, a sulfonylurea, or a TZD.42

GLP-1 receptor agonist: exenatide. Exenatide, the only FDA-approved GLP-1 receptor agonist, is the synthetic version of exendin-4, which binds to the human GLP-1 receptor and in vitro possesses many of the glucoregulatory effects of endogenous GLP-1.30,32 Exenatide is indicated as monotherapy or adjunctive therapy for patients with T2DM who have not achieved adequate glycemic control with metformin, a sulfonylurea, a TZD, or metformin in combination with a sulfonylurea or a TZD.43 Exenatide is administered by SC injection BID at a starting dosage of 5 mg BID for 4 weeks, followed by an increase to 10 mg BID.

Exenatide has been shown not only to enhance glucose-dependent insulin secretion but also to restore impaired first-phase insulin response in subjects with T2DM. Exenatide also helps control postprandial glycemic excursions by suppressing inappropriate glucagon secretion, slowing accelerated gastric emptying, and enhancing satiety. The increased satiety results in decreased food intake and weight loss.31,44 In a recent head-to-head crossover study, exenatide was shown to be more effective than sitagliptin in lowering postprandial glucose concentrations, increasing insulin secretion, and reducing postprandial glucagon secretion.45 Exenatide also slowed gastric emptying and reduced caloric intake.

Exenatide, in most studies, resulted in a placebo-subtracted HbA1c reduction of approximately –1.0% and in one study lowered HbA1c from baseline by –1.5%. Completer analyses have shown HbA1c reductions of –1.0% up to 3 years and –0.8% up to 3.5 years. Exenatide has also been associated with a mean weight loss of as much as –3.6 kg at 30 weeks and as much as –5.3 kg at 3.5 years.33–35,46,47 A 1-year study showed that exenatide improved beta-cell secretory function compared with insulin glargine in metformin-treated patients with T2DM.48 Long-term data, including findings from completed and intention-to-treat analyses of 82 weeks49 to at least 3 years47 have demonstrated that exenatide improved CV risk factors, including those related to BP, lipids, and hepatic injury biomarkers.

Therapies in development

Incretin-based therapies in development include a novel once-weekly formulation of exenatide; taspoglutide, another once-weekly GLP-1 receptor agonist; and liraglutide, a GLP-1 receptor agonist that is administered once daily.50 Liraglutide is currently being evaluated in clinical trials as a once-daily SC injection.51–53 Liraglutide has been reported to reduce HbA1c by –1.1% at 26 weeks and up to –1.14% at 52 weeks and result in weight loss (up to –2.8 kg at 26 weeks and up to –2.5 kg at 52 weeks) in patients with T2DM who are treatment-naïve or taking other antidiabetes agents, including metformin, sulfonylurea, and TZD.51–53 Evaluation of the once-weekly formulation of exenatide showed reductions in HbA1c of –1.9% at 30 weeks and –2.0% at 52 weeks with a weight loss of –3.7 kg at 30 weeks and –4.1 kg over 52 weeks of treatment.46,54

CONCLUSION

In the United States, the epidemics of excessive weight and T2DM have contributed to an increased medical risk for many individuals. Comprehensive diabetes treatments targeting not only hyperglycemia but also frequently associated overweight/obesity, hypertension, and dyslipidemia will be required to reduce such risk. Current treatment strategies have evolved based on updated clinical guidelines and trials, as well as practice experience, including those related to newer agents. Incretin-based therapies, such as the GLP-1 receptor agonist, exenatide, and the DPP-4 inhibitors, sitagliptin and saxagliptin, are important additions to the treatment armamentarium, offering a reduction in hyperglycemia and beneficial effects on weight (reduction with exenatide and neutral with sitagliptin), and have been shown to improve several CV risk factors.

Data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention indicate that almost 24 million Americans, or 7.8% of the population, have diabetes; 90% to 95% of these have type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM).1 Diabetes and excessive weight often coexist. An analysis of data from the 1999–2002 National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) showed that among individuals with diabetes, 85% were overweight or obese and 55% were obese.2

Gaps remain in the management of T2DM between the goals for clinical parameters of care (eg, control of glucose, blood pressure [BP], and lipids) and actual clinical practice.3 NHANES data reveal that glycemic control improved from a mean glycosylated hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c) of 7.82% in 1999–2000 to 7.18% in 2003–2004.4 Hazard models based on the United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) 10-year outcomes data in 4,320 newly diagnosed T2DM patients suggest that a sustained decrease in HbA1c of 0.511 percentage points could reduce diabetes complications by 10.7%.4,5

Additional analysis of NHANES data showed that in 2003–2004, about 57% of individuals achieved glycemic control, 48% reached BP targets, and 50% achieved target cholesterol goals.Only about 13% of diabetes patients achieved their target goals for all three parameters concurrently.6

This article reviews the association between cardiometabolic risk and the current antihyperglycemic treatments for patients with T2DM, with a focus on the role of incretin-related therapies.

THE IMPORTANCE OF CARDIOMETABOLIC RISK IN T2DM

Cardiovascular disease (CVD) is the leading cause of morbidity and mortality among people with diabetes and is the reported cause of mortality in up to 65% of deaths in persons with diabetes in the United States.7 The risk of CVD is two- to fourfold greater among adults with diabetes than among adults who do not have diabetes.8 The risk of CVD in patients with T2DM was evident in the UKPDS 17, where macrovascular complications, including CVD, were about twice as common as microvascular complications (20% vs 9%) after 9 years of follow-up.9 A study that involved more than 44,000 patients showed an almost double rate of mortality from all causes among individuals with T2DM compared with those with no diabetes (hazard ratio, 1.93; 95% confidence interval, 1.89 to 1.97).10 Current guidelines recommend aggressive management of CV risk factors, including BP control, correction of atherogenic dyslipidemia, glycemic control, weight reduction for those who are overweight or obese, and smoking cessation for those who smoke.3,11 Lifestyle interventions, including weight reduction and appropriately prescribed physical activity, result in reduced CV risk factors, which can help slow the progression of T2DM.12

GOALS OF T2DM THERAPY

Several studies have demonstrated that glycemic control can delay or prevent the development and progression of microvascular complications.13,14 UKPDS 33 showed that more intensive blood glucose control (median HbA1c 7.0%) in patients with T2DM followed over 10 years significantly (P = .029) reduced the risk for any diabetes-related end point by 12% compared with conventional therapy (median HbA1c 7.9%). Most of the risk reduction was accounted for by a 25% risk reduction in microvascular end points (P = .0099).13 Another report (UKPDS 35) demonstrated that HbA1c was strongly related to microvascular effects, with a 1% reduction in HbA1c associated with a 37% reduction in microvascular complications.14

Does intensive glucose control reduce CV risk?

To resolve the ongoing question of whether intensive glucose control can lead to a reduction in CV risk in patients with T2DM, three large, long-term trials were conducted within the last decade.15–18 Two of these, the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes (ACCORD) and Action in Diabetes and Vascular Disease: Preterax and Diamicron Modified Release Controlled Evaluation (ADVANCE) trials, each enrolled more than 10,000 previously treated patients with long-standing T2DM. Patients were randomized to standard or intensive glycemic control for 3.5 years in the ACCORD trial and for 5 years in the ADVANCE trial.15,16

The ACCORD and ADVANCE trials, along with the smaller Veterans Administration Diabetes Trial (VADT) (N = 1,791), failed to show that more intensive glycemic control significantly reduced CVD.15–17 Additionally, the glycemic control component of ACCORD was halted because of increased mortality in the intensive arm compared with the standard arm.15 Further analyses of ACCORD data presented at the 69th Scientific Sessions of the American Diabetes Association (ADA) showed that HbA1c values lower than 7.0% did not explain the increased mortality. The 20% higher risk of death for every 1.0% increase in HbA1c greater than 6.0% suggests that glucose concentrations even lower than the general HbA1c goal of less than 7.0% may be appropriate in some patients.18 The most recent finding from VADT was that CV risk was dependent on disease duration and presence of comorbidities. Intensive therapy seemed to work best in patients with diabetes of less than 15 years’ duration, while risk of a CV event was more than doubled with intensive therapy in patients having diabetes for more than 21 years.

Clarification of treatment goals

A position statement of the ADA and a scientific statement of the American College of Cardiology Foundation and the American Heart Association19 concluded that the “evidence obtained from ACCORD, ADVANCE, and VADT does not suggest the need for major changes in glycemic control targets but, rather, additional clarification of the language that has consistently stressed individualization.” They state that while the general HbA1c goal of less than 7.0% seems reasonable, even lower HbA1c goals may be appropriate for some patients if they can be achieved without significant hypoglycemia or other adverse effects. Such patients might include those with diabetes of short duration, long life expectancy, or no significant CVD or hypoglycemia. Conversely, higher HbA1c goals may be appropriate for patients with limited life expectancy, a history of severe hypoglycemia, established microvascular or macrovascular complications, significant other comorbid conditions, or longstanding diabetes in whom an HbA1c of less than 7.0% has been difficult to attain despite optimal treatment and diabetes self-management education.19

 

 

Long-term risk reduction

A 10-year, postinterventional follow-up study (UKPDS 80) of the UKPDS survivor cohort was reported recently.20 Results showed that despite an early loss of glycemic differences between patients treated with diet and those treated with intensive regimens (sulfonylurea or insulin; metformin in overweight patients), the pharmacotherapy group demonstrated a prolonged reduction in microvascular risk as well as a significant reduction in the risk for myocardial infarction (15% [P = .01] in the sulfonylurea-insulin group and 33% [P = .005] in the metformin group) and death from any cause.20 This suggests that early improvement in glycemic control is associated with long-term benefits in the micro- and macrovascular health of patients with T2DM.

Additionally, the recent long-term follow-up of the Steno-2 study21 showed that a multifactorial intervention striving for intensive glucose, BP, and lipid control that included the use of renin-angiotensin system blockers, aspirin, and lipid-lowering agents not only reduced the risk of nonfatal CVD among patients with T2DM and microalbuminuria, but also had sustained beneficial effects on vascular complications and on rates of death from any cause and from CV causes. From a health care payer perspective, intensive multifactorial intervention was more likely to be cost-effective than conventional treatment in Denmark, especially if applied in a primary care setting.22

Comprehensive care needed

The lower-than-expected rates of CV outcomes in the ACCORD, ADVANCE, VADT, and Steno-2 studies reinforce the importance of comprehensive diabetes care that treats not only hyperglycemia but also elevated BP and dyslipidemia; these are considered the “ABCs” of diabetes.11,19 The 2009 ADA standards of medical care guidelines recommend that for most T2DM patients, HbA1c should be maintained at less than 7.0%,3 while the American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists (AACE) 2007 guidelines state that HbA1c should be 6.5% or less.11 Both organizations stress the importance of individualized goals, as discussed above, and advocate BP goals of less than 130/80 mm Hg and dyslipidemia goals of low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) less than 100 mg/dL, high-density lipoprotein cholesterol (HDL-C) greater than 40 mg/dL for men and 50 mg/dL for women, and triglycerides less than 150 mg/dL. It is recommended that an optional LDL-C goal of less than 70 mg/dL be considered for individuals with overt CVD.

CURRENT ANTIHYPERGLYCEMIC TREATMENT STRATEGIES

In response to new insights from clinical research and emerging treatment strategies, disease-specific organizations and medical specialty societies regularly revise and update their treatment guidelines and algorithms. These resources recommend that glycemic progress should be regularly monitored and pharmacologic therapy titrated or new drugs added promptly if glycemic goals are not met after 2 to 3 months.

Several algorithms combine scientific evidence with expert clinical opinion to guide physicians in treating their patients with T2DM. The American College of Endocrinology (ACE)/AACE road maps are designed to help develop individualized treatment regimens to achieve an HbA1c of 6.5% or less.23 The algorithm from a writing group assembled by the ADA and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes (EASD) similarly promotes pharmacologic treatment together with lifestyle modifications to maintain a glycemic goal of HbA1c less than 7.0%.24

OVERVIEW OF ANTIHYPERGLYCEMIC TREATMENT APPROACHES

Lifestyle measures, medical nutrition therapy, and appropriately prescribed physical activity are recommended for virtually all patients with T2DM, as well as weight loss for those who are overweight or obese. Unfortunately, many patients cannot achieve glycemic goals with lifestyle measures alone and require the addition of pharmacotherapy.3 Extensive development of new therapies during the past 15 years has resulted in more than 11 classes of approved antihyperglycemic medications (Table 1) with diverse mechanisms of action and varied effects on HbA1c, body weight, lipids, and other factors.24–26

Initial oral therapy

T2DM is usually treated initially with a single oral agent. Consistent with the progressive nature of the disease, patients often eventually require one or more additional oral agents and in many cases insulin.13,27 Choice of specific agents is based on individual patient circumstances, including the need for weight loss and control of fasting versus postprandial glucose, the presence of dyslipidemia and hypertension, and the risk for and potential consequences of hypoglycemia.24 T2DM patients with severely uncontrolled and symptomatic hyperglycemia are best treated, at least initially, with a combination of insulin therapy and lifestyle intervention, often with metformin.

Metformin. The recently revised ADA/EASD writing group algorithm recommends that patients not requiring initial insulin begin treatment with metformin at the time of diagnosis unless there are contraindications.24 Metformin is not associated with hypoglycemia and is considered weight-neutral, although some patients may lose weight.28

Sulfonylureas. Sulfonylureas stimulate insulin secretion from pancreatic beta cells; their use may be associated with hypoglycemia and weight gain. Mechanisms for weight gain with sulfonylureas include reduction of glucosuria and increased caloric intake to prevent or treat hypoglycemia.11,28 Nateglinide and repaglinide are nonsulfonylurea oral insulin secretagogues. They result in rapid and relatively short-lived insulin responses and are usually administered three times a day, before each meal. Their use may be associated with weight gain and hypoglycemia.11

Thiazolidinediones. Thiazolidinediones (TZD) increase insulin sensitivity in muscle, adipose tissue, and the liver. Hypoglycemia is uncommon with TZD monotherapy but weight gain related to increased and redistributed adiposity and fluid retention frequently occurs.

Alpha-glucosidase inhibitors. The alpha-glucosidase inhibitors are administered before meals and primarily reduce postprandial hyperglycemia. They are generally weight-neutral.28

Insulin. Insulin and insulin analogues are the most effective antihyperglycemic agents, but their use can be associated with hypoglycemia and clinically significant weight gain.28

Colesevelam. Colesevelam is a bile acid sequestrant that was recently approved by the US Food and Drug Administration as an antihyperglycemic therapy in people with T2DM. At a dosage of 1.875 g BID or 3.75 g QD in combination with a sulfonylurea, metformin, or insulin therapy, reductions in HbA1c compared with placebo in clinical trials of colesevelam have ranged from ­–0.5% to –0.7% (P < .02). Frequency of hypoglycemia and weight gain is low with this agent.26

Weight management. Weight reduction is important for overweight or obese patients with T2DM.27,28 Even moderate weight loss (5% of body weight) can be associated with improved insulin action and reduced hyperglycemia.29 Conversely, weight gain has been shown to worsen hyperglycemia and other CV risk factors. Treatment-related weight gain can also lead to decreased regimen adherence, contributing to poor glycemic control.28

 

 

THE ROLE OF INCRETIN HORMONES AND INCRETIN-BASED THERAPIES IN T2DM PATIENTS

Over the last few years, the role of incretin hormones and their contribution to diabetes pathophysiology has become more apparent. The incretin effect refers to the observation that orally administered glucose elicits a greater insulin response than does glucose administered intravenously to produce equivalent blood glucose concentrations.30,31 The incretin effect is diminished in patients with T2DM.

Hormone mediation of the incretin effect

The two hormones that mediate the incretin effect are GIP (also known as gastric inhibitory polypeptide or glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide) and glucagon-like peptide−1 (GLP-1).30,31 GLP-1 has several glucoregulatory actions, including enhancement of endogenous insulin release and suppression of inappropriate glucagon secretion, both in a glucose-dependent manner. Therefore, these effects of GLP-1 occur only when glucose concentrations are elevated, thereby minimizing the risk of hypoglycemia. GLP-1 also regulates gastric emptying; infusions of GLP-1 can slow the accelerated emptying that is often present in T2DM patients. GLP-1 also increases satiety and decreases food intake via a central mechanism.31

Because GLP-1 is rapidly inactivated by the enzyme dipeptidyl peptidase–4 (DPP-4), therapeutic use of GLP-1 would require continuous infusion, which is impractical.30,31 Two strategies have been used to produce incretin-related therapies. One, inhibition of the DPP-4 enzyme, results in a two- to threefold enhancement of endogenous GLP-1. The other, involving agents that resist breakdown by DPP-4 but bind to and activate the GLP-1 receptor, produces glucoregulatory effects similar to those of GLP-1.30

Following subcutaneous (SC) injection, GLP-1 receptor agonists enhance insulin secretion and suppress inappropriately elevated glucagon, both in a glucose-dependent manner, as well as slow gastric emptying and enhance satiety.30 DPP-4 inhibitors provide glucose-dependent enhanced insulin secretion and glucagon suppression, but they do not have the same effects on gastric emptying or satiety.

Clinically, the GLP-1 receptor agonists improve glycemia and are associated with weight loss.32–35 Adverse gastrointestinal symptoms are relatively common during the first few weeks of treatment. DPP-4 inhibitors improve glycemia but are weight-neutral and are not generally associated with significant gastrointestinal symptoms.32,36–38

Incretin-based therapies

Incretin-based therapies are currently part of the antihyperglycemic armamentarium.25,32 The AACE guidelines11 and the ACE/AACE roadmaps23 include the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide and the DPP-4 inhibitor sitagliptin among antihyperglycemic therapies for patients with T2DM. The most recent update of the consensus algorithm statement of a joint ADA/EASD writing group included GLP-1 receptor agonists (but not DPP-4 inhibitors) in tier 2 of preferred agents, especially for patients who have concerns related to weight and hypoglycemia.24 They noted that DPP-4 inhibitors may be appropriate choices in selected patients.

DPP-4 inhibitors: sitagliptin, saxagliptin. Until recently, sitagliptin was the only DPP-4 inhibitor available in the United States. Sitagliptin is approved by the FDA for treatment of T2DM at a recommended oral dosage of 100 mg QD, either as monotherapy or in combination with other oral antihyperglycemic medications. The dosage of sitagliptin should be reduced to 50 mg/day in patients with creatinine clearance (CrCl) levels that are between 30 mL/min and 50 mL/min and to 25 mg/day in those with CrCl less than 30 mL/min.39

In a meta-analysis of incretin-based therapies, DPP-4 inhibitors produced a reduction in HbA1c compared with placebo (weighted mean difference of –0.74%; 95% confidence interval, –0.85% to –0.62%).32 DPP-4 inhibitor antihyperglycemic efficacy has been shown to be similar whether used as a monotherapy or add-on therapy.32,37,38 This same meta-analysis showed DPP-4 inhibitors as having a neutral effect on weight.32 More recently, a single-pill combination of metformin and sitagliptin was approved.40

A study comparing metformin, sitagliptin, and the combination of the two as initial monotherapy in T2DM patients with a baseline HbA1c of 8.8% showed 24-week HbA1c reductions from baseline of –0.66% with sitagliptin 100 mg QD, –0.82% with metformin 500 mg BID, and –1.90% with sitagliptin 50 mg + metformin 1,000 mg BID.41

On July 31, 2009, the FDA approved another DPP-4 inhibitor, saxagliptin, for the treatment of T2DM either as monotherapy or in combination with metformin, a sulfonylurea, or a TZD.42

GLP-1 receptor agonist: exenatide. Exenatide, the only FDA-approved GLP-1 receptor agonist, is the synthetic version of exendin-4, which binds to the human GLP-1 receptor and in vitro possesses many of the glucoregulatory effects of endogenous GLP-1.30,32 Exenatide is indicated as monotherapy or adjunctive therapy for patients with T2DM who have not achieved adequate glycemic control with metformin, a sulfonylurea, a TZD, or metformin in combination with a sulfonylurea or a TZD.43 Exenatide is administered by SC injection BID at a starting dosage of 5 mg BID for 4 weeks, followed by an increase to 10 mg BID.

Exenatide has been shown not only to enhance glucose-dependent insulin secretion but also to restore impaired first-phase insulin response in subjects with T2DM. Exenatide also helps control postprandial glycemic excursions by suppressing inappropriate glucagon secretion, slowing accelerated gastric emptying, and enhancing satiety. The increased satiety results in decreased food intake and weight loss.31,44 In a recent head-to-head crossover study, exenatide was shown to be more effective than sitagliptin in lowering postprandial glucose concentrations, increasing insulin secretion, and reducing postprandial glucagon secretion.45 Exenatide also slowed gastric emptying and reduced caloric intake.

Exenatide, in most studies, resulted in a placebo-subtracted HbA1c reduction of approximately –1.0% and in one study lowered HbA1c from baseline by –1.5%. Completer analyses have shown HbA1c reductions of –1.0% up to 3 years and –0.8% up to 3.5 years. Exenatide has also been associated with a mean weight loss of as much as –3.6 kg at 30 weeks and as much as –5.3 kg at 3.5 years.33–35,46,47 A 1-year study showed that exenatide improved beta-cell secretory function compared with insulin glargine in metformin-treated patients with T2DM.48 Long-term data, including findings from completed and intention-to-treat analyses of 82 weeks49 to at least 3 years47 have demonstrated that exenatide improved CV risk factors, including those related to BP, lipids, and hepatic injury biomarkers.

Therapies in development

Incretin-based therapies in development include a novel once-weekly formulation of exenatide; taspoglutide, another once-weekly GLP-1 receptor agonist; and liraglutide, a GLP-1 receptor agonist that is administered once daily.50 Liraglutide is currently being evaluated in clinical trials as a once-daily SC injection.51–53 Liraglutide has been reported to reduce HbA1c by –1.1% at 26 weeks and up to –1.14% at 52 weeks and result in weight loss (up to –2.8 kg at 26 weeks and up to –2.5 kg at 52 weeks) in patients with T2DM who are treatment-naïve or taking other antidiabetes agents, including metformin, sulfonylurea, and TZD.51–53 Evaluation of the once-weekly formulation of exenatide showed reductions in HbA1c of –1.9% at 30 weeks and –2.0% at 52 weeks with a weight loss of –3.7 kg at 30 weeks and –4.1 kg over 52 weeks of treatment.46,54

CONCLUSION

In the United States, the epidemics of excessive weight and T2DM have contributed to an increased medical risk for many individuals. Comprehensive diabetes treatments targeting not only hyperglycemia but also frequently associated overweight/obesity, hypertension, and dyslipidemia will be required to reduce such risk. Current treatment strategies have evolved based on updated clinical guidelines and trials, as well as practice experience, including those related to newer agents. Incretin-based therapies, such as the GLP-1 receptor agonist, exenatide, and the DPP-4 inhibitors, sitagliptin and saxagliptin, are important additions to the treatment armamentarium, offering a reduction in hyperglycemia and beneficial effects on weight (reduction with exenatide and neutral with sitagliptin), and have been shown to improve several CV risk factors.

References
  1. National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases. National Diabetes Statistics, 2007 fact sheet. Bethesda, MD: US Department of Health and Human Services, National Institutes of Health, 2008. Available at: http://www.diabetes.niddk.nih.gov/dm/pubs/statistics/index.htm. Accessed September 16, 2009.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Prevalence of overweight and obesity among adults with diagnosed diabetes: United States, 1988–1994 and 1999–2002. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2004; 53:1066–1068.
  3. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes: 2009. Diabetes Care 2009; 32(suppl 1):S13–S61.
  4. Hoerger TJ, Segel JE, Gregg EW, Saaddine JB. Is glycemic control improving in U.S. adults? Diabetes Care 2008; 31:81–86.
  5. Stratton IM, Cull CA, Adler AI, Matthews DR, Neil HA, Holman RR. Additive effects of glycaemia and blood pressure exposure on risk of complications in type 2 diabetes: a prospective observational study (UKPDS 75). Diabetologia 2006; 49:1761–1769.
  6. Ong KL, Cheung BM, Wong LY, Wat NM, Tan KC, Lam KS. Prevalence, treatment, and control of diagnosed diabetes in the U.S. National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey 1999–2004. Ann Epidemiol 2008; 18:222–229.
  7. Engelgau MM, Geiss LS, Saaddine JB, et al. The evolving diabetes burden in the United States. Ann Intern Med 2004; 140:945–950.
  8. Fox CS, Coady S, Sorlie PD, et al. Trends in cardiovascular complications of diabetes. JAMA 2004; 292:2495–2499.
  9. Turner R, Cull C, Holman R. United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study 17: a 9-year update of a randomized, controlled trial on the effect of improved metabolic control on complications in noninsulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. Ann Intern Med 1996; 124(1 Pt 2):136–145.
  10. Mulnier HE, Seaman HE, Raleigh VS, Soedamah-Muthu SS, Colhoun HM, Lawrenson RA. Mortality in people with type 2 diabetes in the UK. Diabet Med 2006; 23:516–521.
  11. AACE Diabetes Mellitus Clinical Practice Guidelines Task Force. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists medical guidelines for clinical practice for the management of diabetes mellitus. Endocr Pract 2007; 13(suppl 1):S4–S68.
  12. American Diabetes Association. Nutrition recommendations and interventions for diabetes: a position statement of the American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 2008; 31(suppl 1):S61−S78.
  13. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Intensive blood-glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). Lancet 1998; 352:837–853.
  14. Stratton IM, Adler AI, Neil HA, et al. Association of glycaemia with macrovascular and microvascular complications of type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 35): prospective observational study. BMJ 2000; 321:405–412.
  15. The Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes Study Group. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545–2559.
  16. The ADVANCE Collaborative Group. Intensive blood glucose control and vascular outcomes in patients with type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2560–2572.
  17. Duckworth W, Abraira C, Moritz T, et al; for the VADT Investigators. Glucose control and vascular complications in veterans with type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2009; 360:129–139.
  18. Kerr M. ADA 2009: intensive glycemic control not directly linked to excess cardiovascular risk. Medscape Medical News Web site. http://www.medscape.com/viewarticle/704260_print. Published June 11, 2009. Accessed September 16, 2009.
  19. Skyler JS, Bergenstal R, Bonow RO, et al. Intensive glycemic control and the prevention of cardiovascular events: implications of the ACCORD, ADVANCE, and VA diabetes trials: a position statement of the American Diabetes Association and a scientific statement of the American College of Cardiology Foundation and the American Heart Association. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:187–192.
  20. Holman RR, Paul SK, Bethel MA, Matthews DR, Neil HA. 10-year follow-up of intensive glucose control in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 359:1577–1589.
  21. Gaede P, Lund-Andersen H, Parving HH, Pedersen O. Effect of a multifactorial intervention on mortality in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:580–591.
  22. Gaede P, Valentine WJ, Palmer AJ, et al. Cost-effectiveness of intensified versus conventional multifactorial intervention in type 2 diabetes: results and projections from the Steno-2 study. Diabetes Care 2008; 31:1510–1515.
  23. ACE/AACE Diabetes Road Map Task Force. Road maps to achieve glycemic control in type 2 diabetes mellitus. Endocr Pract 2007; 13:260–268.
  24. Nathan DM, Buse JB, Davidson MB, et al. Medical management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes: a consensus algorithm for the initiation and adjustment of therapy: a consensus statement of the American Diabetes Association and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:193–203.
  25. Alexander GC, Sehgal NL, Moloney RM, Stafford RS. National trends in treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus, 1994–2007. Arch Intern Med 2008; 168:2088–2094.
  26. Sonnett TE, Levien TL, Neumiller JJ, Gates BJ, Setter SM. Colesevelam hydrochloride for the treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus. Clin Ther 2009; 31:245–259.
  27. DeFronzo RA. Pharmacologic therapy for type 2 diabetes mellitus. Ann Intern Med 1999; 131:281–303.
  28. Purnell JQ, Weyer C. Weight effect of current and experimental drugs for diabetes mellitus: from promotion to alleviation of obesity. Treat Endocrinol 2003; 2:33–47.
  29. Klein S, Sheard NF, Pi-Sunyer X, et al. Weight management through lifestyle modification for the prevention and management of type 2 diabetes: rationale and strategies: a statement of the American Diabetes Association, the North American Association for the Study of Obesity, and the American Society for Clinical Nutrition. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2067–2073.
  30. Stonehouse A, Okerson T, Kendall D, Maggs D. Emerging incretin based therapies for type 2 diabetes: incretin mimetics and DPP-4 inhibitors. Curr Diabetes Rev 2008; 4:101–109.
  31. Drucker DJ. The biology of incretin hormones. Cell Metab 2006; 3:153–165.
  32. Amori RE, Lau J, Pittas AG. Efficacy and safety of incretin therapy in type 2 diabetes: systematic review and meta-analysis. JAMA 2007; 298:194–206.
  33. Buse JB, Henry RR, Han J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in sulfonylurea-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2628–2635.
  34. DeFronzo RA, Ratner RE, Han J, Kim DD, Fineman MS, Baron AD. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control and weight over 30 weeks in metformin-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1092–1100.
  35. Kendall DM, Riddle MC, Rosenstock J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes treated with metformin and a sulfonylurea. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1083–1091.
  36. Aschner P, Kipnes MS, Lunceford JK, et al. Effect of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy on glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2632−2637.
  37. Charbonnel B, Karasik A, Liu J, Wu M, Meininger G, for the Sitagliptin Study 020 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin added to ongoing metformin therapy in patients with type 2 diabetes inadequately controlled with metformin alone. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2638–2643.
  38. Scott R, Wu M, Sanchez M, Stein P. Efficacy and tolerability of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy over 12 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes. Int J Clin Pract 2007; 61:171–180.
  39. Januvia. Physicians’ Desk Reference. 63rd edition. Montvale, NJ: Physicians’ Desk Reference Inc; 2008:2048–2054.
  40. Janumet. Physicians’ Desk Reference. 63rd edition. Montvale, NJ: Physicians’ Desk Reference Inc; 2008:2041–2048.
  41. Goldstein BJ, Feinglos MN, Lunceford JK, Johnson J, Williams-Herman DE, for the Sitagliptin 036 Study Group. Effect of initial combination therapy with sitagliptin, a dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor, and metformin on glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2007; 30:1979–1987.
  42. US Department of Health and Human Services. FDA approves new drug treatment for type 2 diabetes. US Food and Drug Administration Web site. http://www.fda.gov/newsevents/newsroom/pressannouncements/ucm174780.htm. Published July 31, 2009. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  43. Byetta [package insert]. San Diego, CA: Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc.; 2009.
  44. Edwards CM, Stanley SA, Davis R, et al. Exendin-4 reduces fasting and postprandial glucose and decreases energy intake in healthy volunteers. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 2001; 281:E155–E161.
  45. DeFronzo RA, Okerson T, Viswanathan P, Guan X, Holcombe JH, MacConell L. Effects of exenatide versus sitagliptin on postprandial glucose, insulin and glucagon secretion, gastric emptying, and caloric intake: a randomized, cross-over study. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:2943–2952.
  46. Drucker DJ, Buse JB, Taylor K, et al. Exenatide once weekly versus twice daily for the treatment of type 2 diabetes: a randomised, open-label, non-inferiority study. Lancet 2008; 372:1240–1250.
  47. Klonoff DC, Buse JB, Nielsen LL, et al. Exenatide effects on diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular risk factors and hepatic biomarkers in patients with type 2 diabetes treated for at least 3 years. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:275–286.
  48. Bunck MC, Diamant M, Cornér A, et al. One-year treatment with exenatide improves beta-cell function, compared with insulin glargine, in metformin-treated type 2 diabetic patients: a randomized, controlled trial. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:762–768.
  49. Blonde L, Klein EJ, Han J, et al. Interim analysis of the effects of exenatide treatment on A1C, weight and cardiovascular risk factors over 82 weeks in 314 overweight patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Obes Metab 2006; 8:436–447.
  50. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ, Maida A, Lamont BJ. ADA 2008: incretin-based therapeutics. MedscapeCME Web site. http://www.medscape.com/viewprogram/15786. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  51. Garber A, Henry R, Ratner R, et al. Liraglutide versus glimepiride monotherapy for type 2 diabetes (LEAD-3 Mono): a randomised, 52-week, phase III, double-blind, parallel-treatment trial. Lancet 2009; 373:473–481.
  52. Nauck M, Frid A, Hermansen K, et al. Efficacy and safety comparison of liraglutide, glimepiride, and placebo, all in combination with metformin, in type 2 diabetes: the LEAD (liraglutide effect and action in diabetes)-2 study. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:84–90.
  53. Marre M, Shaw J, Brändle M, et al. Liraglutide, a once-daily human GLP-1 analogue, added to a sulphonylurea over 26 weeks produces greater improvements in glycaemic and weight control compared with adding rosiglitazone or placebo in subjects with type 2 diabetes (LEAD-1 SU). Diabet Med 2009; 26:268–278.
  54. Bergenstal RM, Kim T, Trautmann M, Zhuang D, Okerson T, Taylor K. Exenatide once weekly elicited improvements in blood pressure and lipid profile over 52 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes. Circulation 2008; 118:S1086. Abstract 1239.
References
  1. National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases. National Diabetes Statistics, 2007 fact sheet. Bethesda, MD: US Department of Health and Human Services, National Institutes of Health, 2008. Available at: http://www.diabetes.niddk.nih.gov/dm/pubs/statistics/index.htm. Accessed September 16, 2009.
  2. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). Prevalence of overweight and obesity among adults with diagnosed diabetes: United States, 1988–1994 and 1999–2002. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2004; 53:1066–1068.
  3. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes: 2009. Diabetes Care 2009; 32(suppl 1):S13–S61.
  4. Hoerger TJ, Segel JE, Gregg EW, Saaddine JB. Is glycemic control improving in U.S. adults? Diabetes Care 2008; 31:81–86.
  5. Stratton IM, Cull CA, Adler AI, Matthews DR, Neil HA, Holman RR. Additive effects of glycaemia and blood pressure exposure on risk of complications in type 2 diabetes: a prospective observational study (UKPDS 75). Diabetologia 2006; 49:1761–1769.
  6. Ong KL, Cheung BM, Wong LY, Wat NM, Tan KC, Lam KS. Prevalence, treatment, and control of diagnosed diabetes in the U.S. National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey 1999–2004. Ann Epidemiol 2008; 18:222–229.
  7. Engelgau MM, Geiss LS, Saaddine JB, et al. The evolving diabetes burden in the United States. Ann Intern Med 2004; 140:945–950.
  8. Fox CS, Coady S, Sorlie PD, et al. Trends in cardiovascular complications of diabetes. JAMA 2004; 292:2495–2499.
  9. Turner R, Cull C, Holman R. United Kingdom Prospective Diabetes Study 17: a 9-year update of a randomized, controlled trial on the effect of improved metabolic control on complications in noninsulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. Ann Intern Med 1996; 124(1 Pt 2):136–145.
  10. Mulnier HE, Seaman HE, Raleigh VS, Soedamah-Muthu SS, Colhoun HM, Lawrenson RA. Mortality in people with type 2 diabetes in the UK. Diabet Med 2006; 23:516–521.
  11. AACE Diabetes Mellitus Clinical Practice Guidelines Task Force. American Association of Clinical Endocrinologists medical guidelines for clinical practice for the management of diabetes mellitus. Endocr Pract 2007; 13(suppl 1):S4–S68.
  12. American Diabetes Association. Nutrition recommendations and interventions for diabetes: a position statement of the American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 2008; 31(suppl 1):S61−S78.
  13. UK Prospective Diabetes Study (UKPDS) Group. Intensive blood-glucose control with sulphonylureas or insulin compared with conventional treatment and risk of complications in patients with type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 33). Lancet 1998; 352:837–853.
  14. Stratton IM, Adler AI, Neil HA, et al. Association of glycaemia with macrovascular and microvascular complications of type 2 diabetes (UKPDS 35): prospective observational study. BMJ 2000; 321:405–412.
  15. The Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes Study Group. Effects of intensive glucose lowering in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2545–2559.
  16. The ADVANCE Collaborative Group. Intensive blood glucose control and vascular outcomes in patients with type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:2560–2572.
  17. Duckworth W, Abraira C, Moritz T, et al; for the VADT Investigators. Glucose control and vascular complications in veterans with type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2009; 360:129–139.
  18. Kerr M. ADA 2009: intensive glycemic control not directly linked to excess cardiovascular risk. Medscape Medical News Web site. http://www.medscape.com/viewarticle/704260_print. Published June 11, 2009. Accessed September 16, 2009.
  19. Skyler JS, Bergenstal R, Bonow RO, et al. Intensive glycemic control and the prevention of cardiovascular events: implications of the ACCORD, ADVANCE, and VA diabetes trials: a position statement of the American Diabetes Association and a scientific statement of the American College of Cardiology Foundation and the American Heart Association. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:187–192.
  20. Holman RR, Paul SK, Bethel MA, Matthews DR, Neil HA. 10-year follow-up of intensive glucose control in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 359:1577–1589.
  21. Gaede P, Lund-Andersen H, Parving HH, Pedersen O. Effect of a multifactorial intervention on mortality in type 2 diabetes. N Engl J Med 2008; 358:580–591.
  22. Gaede P, Valentine WJ, Palmer AJ, et al. Cost-effectiveness of intensified versus conventional multifactorial intervention in type 2 diabetes: results and projections from the Steno-2 study. Diabetes Care 2008; 31:1510–1515.
  23. ACE/AACE Diabetes Road Map Task Force. Road maps to achieve glycemic control in type 2 diabetes mellitus. Endocr Pract 2007; 13:260–268.
  24. Nathan DM, Buse JB, Davidson MB, et al. Medical management of hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes: a consensus algorithm for the initiation and adjustment of therapy: a consensus statement of the American Diabetes Association and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:193–203.
  25. Alexander GC, Sehgal NL, Moloney RM, Stafford RS. National trends in treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus, 1994–2007. Arch Intern Med 2008; 168:2088–2094.
  26. Sonnett TE, Levien TL, Neumiller JJ, Gates BJ, Setter SM. Colesevelam hydrochloride for the treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus. Clin Ther 2009; 31:245–259.
  27. DeFronzo RA. Pharmacologic therapy for type 2 diabetes mellitus. Ann Intern Med 1999; 131:281–303.
  28. Purnell JQ, Weyer C. Weight effect of current and experimental drugs for diabetes mellitus: from promotion to alleviation of obesity. Treat Endocrinol 2003; 2:33–47.
  29. Klein S, Sheard NF, Pi-Sunyer X, et al. Weight management through lifestyle modification for the prevention and management of type 2 diabetes: rationale and strategies: a statement of the American Diabetes Association, the North American Association for the Study of Obesity, and the American Society for Clinical Nutrition. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2067–2073.
  30. Stonehouse A, Okerson T, Kendall D, Maggs D. Emerging incretin based therapies for type 2 diabetes: incretin mimetics and DPP-4 inhibitors. Curr Diabetes Rev 2008; 4:101–109.
  31. Drucker DJ. The biology of incretin hormones. Cell Metab 2006; 3:153–165.
  32. Amori RE, Lau J, Pittas AG. Efficacy and safety of incretin therapy in type 2 diabetes: systematic review and meta-analysis. JAMA 2007; 298:194–206.
  33. Buse JB, Henry RR, Han J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in sulfonylurea-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2628–2635.
  34. DeFronzo RA, Ratner RE, Han J, Kim DD, Fineman MS, Baron AD. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control and weight over 30 weeks in metformin-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1092–1100.
  35. Kendall DM, Riddle MC, Rosenstock J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes treated with metformin and a sulfonylurea. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1083–1091.
  36. Aschner P, Kipnes MS, Lunceford JK, et al. Effect of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy on glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2632−2637.
  37. Charbonnel B, Karasik A, Liu J, Wu M, Meininger G, for the Sitagliptin Study 020 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin added to ongoing metformin therapy in patients with type 2 diabetes inadequately controlled with metformin alone. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2638–2643.
  38. Scott R, Wu M, Sanchez M, Stein P. Efficacy and tolerability of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy over 12 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes. Int J Clin Pract 2007; 61:171–180.
  39. Januvia. Physicians’ Desk Reference. 63rd edition. Montvale, NJ: Physicians’ Desk Reference Inc; 2008:2048–2054.
  40. Janumet. Physicians’ Desk Reference. 63rd edition. Montvale, NJ: Physicians’ Desk Reference Inc; 2008:2041–2048.
  41. Goldstein BJ, Feinglos MN, Lunceford JK, Johnson J, Williams-Herman DE, for the Sitagliptin 036 Study Group. Effect of initial combination therapy with sitagliptin, a dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor, and metformin on glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2007; 30:1979–1987.
  42. US Department of Health and Human Services. FDA approves new drug treatment for type 2 diabetes. US Food and Drug Administration Web site. http://www.fda.gov/newsevents/newsroom/pressannouncements/ucm174780.htm. Published July 31, 2009. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  43. Byetta [package insert]. San Diego, CA: Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc.; 2009.
  44. Edwards CM, Stanley SA, Davis R, et al. Exendin-4 reduces fasting and postprandial glucose and decreases energy intake in healthy volunteers. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 2001; 281:E155–E161.
  45. DeFronzo RA, Okerson T, Viswanathan P, Guan X, Holcombe JH, MacConell L. Effects of exenatide versus sitagliptin on postprandial glucose, insulin and glucagon secretion, gastric emptying, and caloric intake: a randomized, cross-over study. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:2943–2952.
  46. Drucker DJ, Buse JB, Taylor K, et al. Exenatide once weekly versus twice daily for the treatment of type 2 diabetes: a randomised, open-label, non-inferiority study. Lancet 2008; 372:1240–1250.
  47. Klonoff DC, Buse JB, Nielsen LL, et al. Exenatide effects on diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular risk factors and hepatic biomarkers in patients with type 2 diabetes treated for at least 3 years. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:275–286.
  48. Bunck MC, Diamant M, Cornér A, et al. One-year treatment with exenatide improves beta-cell function, compared with insulin glargine, in metformin-treated type 2 diabetic patients: a randomized, controlled trial. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:762–768.
  49. Blonde L, Klein EJ, Han J, et al. Interim analysis of the effects of exenatide treatment on A1C, weight and cardiovascular risk factors over 82 weeks in 314 overweight patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Obes Metab 2006; 8:436–447.
  50. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ, Maida A, Lamont BJ. ADA 2008: incretin-based therapeutics. MedscapeCME Web site. http://www.medscape.com/viewprogram/15786. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  51. Garber A, Henry R, Ratner R, et al. Liraglutide versus glimepiride monotherapy for type 2 diabetes (LEAD-3 Mono): a randomised, 52-week, phase III, double-blind, parallel-treatment trial. Lancet 2009; 373:473–481.
  52. Nauck M, Frid A, Hermansen K, et al. Efficacy and safety comparison of liraglutide, glimepiride, and placebo, all in combination with metformin, in type 2 diabetes: the LEAD (liraglutide effect and action in diabetes)-2 study. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:84–90.
  53. Marre M, Shaw J, Brändle M, et al. Liraglutide, a once-daily human GLP-1 analogue, added to a sulphonylurea over 26 weeks produces greater improvements in glycaemic and weight control compared with adding rosiglitazone or placebo in subjects with type 2 diabetes (LEAD-1 SU). Diabet Med 2009; 26:268–278.
  54. Bergenstal RM, Kim T, Trautmann M, Zhuang D, Okerson T, Taylor K. Exenatide once weekly elicited improvements in blood pressure and lipid profile over 52 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes. Circulation 2008; 118:S1086. Abstract 1239.
Page Number
S4-S11
Page Number
S4-S11
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Current antihyperglycemic treatment strategies for patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus
Display Headline
Current antihyperglycemic treatment strategies for patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus
Citation Override
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine 2009 December;76(suppl 5):S4-S11
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • Up to 65% of deaths among people with diabetes are caused by cardiovascular disease.
  • Glycemic control can delay or slow the progression of microvascular complications.
  • In addition to hyperglycemia, comprehensive diabetes therapy must target cardiovascular disease–related risk factors, including excess weight/obesity, elevated blood pressure, and abnormal lipid concentrations.
  • Diminished incretin hormonal activity contributes to the pathophysiology of diabetes.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 08:00
Un-Gate On Date
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 08:00
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 08:00
Article PDF Media

Role of the incretin pathway in the pathogenesis of type 2 diabetes mellitus

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 10/02/2018 - 11:45
Display Headline
Role of the incretin pathway in the pathogenesis of type 2 diabetes mellitus

It has long been understood that the pathophysiology of type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM) is based on the triad of progressive decline in insulin-producing pancreatic beta cells, an increase in insulin resistance, and increased hepatic glucose production.1,2 It is now evident that other factors, including defective actions of the gastrointestinal (GI) incretin hormones glucagon-like peptide–1 (GLP-1) and glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP), also play significant roles.2–5 The uncontrolled hyperglycemia resulting from such defects may lead to microvascular complications, including retinopathy, neuropathy, microangiopathy, and nephropathy, and macrovascular complications, such as coronary artery disease and peripheral vascular disease.

This review explores the growing understanding of the role of the incretins in normal insulin secretion, as well as in the pathogenesis of T2DM, and examines the pathophysiologic basis for the benefits and therapeutic application of incretin-based therapies in T2DM.1,2

THE GI SYSTEM AND GLUCOSE HOMEOSTASIS IN THE HEALTHY STATE

The GI system plays an integral role in glucose homeostasis.6 The observation that orally administered glucose provides a stronger insulinotropic stimulus than an intravenous glucose challenge provided insight into the regulation of plasma glucose by the GI system of healthy individuals.7 The incretin effect, as this is termed, may be responsible for 50% to 70% of the total insulin secreted following oral glucose intake.8

Two GI peptide hormones (the incretins)—GLP-1 and GIP—were found to exert major glucoregulatory actions.3,9,10 Within minutes of nutrient ingestion, GLP-1 is secreted from intestinal L cells in the distal ileum and colon, while GIP is released by intestinal K cells in the duodenum and jejunum.3 GLP-1 and GIP trigger their insulinotropic actions by binding beta-cell receptors.3 GLP-1 receptors are expressed on pancreatic glucagon-containing alpha and delta cells as well as on beta cells, whereas GIP receptors are expressed primarily on beta cells.3,8 GLP-1 receptors are also expressed in the central nervous system (CNS), peripheral nervous system, lung, heart, and GI tract, while GIP receptors are expressed in adipose tissue and the CNS.3 GLP-1 inhibits glucose-dependent glucagon secretion from alpha cells.3 In healthy individuals, fasting glucose is managed by tonic insulin/glucagon secretion, but excursions of postprandial glucose (PPG) are controlled by insulin and the incretin hormones.11

Additionally, in animal studies, GLP-1 has been shown to induce the transcriptional activation of the insulin gene and insulin biosynthesis, thus increasing beta-cell proliferation and decreasing beta-cell apoptosis.12 GLP-1 stimulates a CNS-mediated pathway of insulin secretion, slows gastric emptying, increases CNS-mediated satiety leading to reduced food intake, indirectly increases insulin sensitivity and nutrient uptake in skeletal muscle and adipose tissue, and exerts neuroprotective effects.8

Reprinted, with permission, from European Journal of Endocrinology (Van Gaal LF, et al. Eur J Endocrinol 2008; 158:773–784),13 Copyright © 2008 European Society of Endocrinology.
Figure 1. Biologic actions of GIP and GLP-1 in relation to the pathophysiology of type 2 diabetes mellitus. GIP = glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide, GLP-1 = glucagon-like peptide–1; PP = postprandial; solid arrows = potentially beneficial actions; dashed arrows = potentially harmful actions; slashed arrows = actions with no effect.
Along with its insulinotropic action, GIP has been shown in animal studies to inhibit gastric acid secretion, bioregulate fat metabolism in adipocytes, increase glucagon secretion and fat deposition, increase beta-cell replication, and decrease beta-cell apoptosis.8Figure 1 illustrates the biologic actions of GLP-1 and GIP.13

Both GLP-1 and GIP are rapidly degraded by the serine protease dipeptidyl peptidase–4 (DPP-4), which is widely expressed in bound and free forms.14 A recent study in healthy adults showed that GLP-1 concentration declined even during maximal DPP-4 inhibition, suggesting that there may be pathways of GLP-1 elimination other than DPP-4 enzymatic degradation.15

INCRETINS AND THE PATHOGENESIS OF T2DM

Studies have shown that incretin pathways play a role in the progression of T2DM.3,16 The significant reduction in the incretin effect seen in patients with T2DM has been attributed to several factors, including impaired secretion of GLP-1, accelerated metabolism of GLP-1 and GIP, and defective responsiveness to both hormones.16 Many patients with T2DM also have accelerated gastric emptying that may contribute to deterioration of their glycemic control.17

While GIP concentration is normal or modestly increased in patients with T2DM,16,18 the insulinotropic actions of GIP are significantly diminished.19 Thus, patients with T2DM have an impaired responsiveness to GIP with a possible link to GIP-receptor downregulation or desensitization.20

Are secretory defects a cause or result of T2DM?

In contrast to GIP, the secretion of GLP-1 has been shown to be deficient in patients with T2DM.18 As with GIP, it is unknown to what degree this defect is a cause or consequence of T2DM. In a study of identical twins, defective GLP-1 secretion was observed only in the one sibling with T2DM, suggesting that GLP-1 secretory deficits may be secondary to the development of T2DM.21 Despite the diminished secretion of GLP-1 in patients with T2DM, the insulinotropic actions of GLP-1 are preserved.19 It has also been shown that the effects of GLP-1 on gastric emptying and glucagon secretion are maintained in patients with T2DM.19,22,23

Whether this incretin dysregulation is responsible for or is the end result of hyperglycemia remains a subject of continued investigation. A recent study confirmed that the incretin effect is reduced in patients with T2DM, but advanced the concept that it may be a consequence of the diabetic state.16,24 Notably, impaired actions of GLP-1 and GIP and diminished concentrations of GLP-1 may be partially restored by improved glycemic control.24

Recent preclinical and clinical studies continue to clarify the roles of incretin hormones in T2DM. The findings from a study of obese diabetic mice suggest that the effect of GLP-1 therapy on the long-term remission of diabetes may be caused by improvements in beta-cell function and insulin sensitivity, as well as by a reduction in gluconeogenesis in the liver.25

Incretin effect and glucose tolerance, body mass index

Another study was conducted to evaluate quantitatively the separate impacts of obesity and hyperglycemia on the incretin effect in patients with T2DM, patients with impaired glucose tolerance, and patients with normal glucose tolerance.26 There was a significant (P ≤ .05) reduction in the incretin effect in terms of total insulin secretion, beta-cell glucose sensitivity, and the GLP-1 response to oral glucose in patients with T2DM compared with individuals whose glucose tolerance was normal or impaired. Each manifestation of the incretin effect was inversely related to both glucose tolerance and body mass index in an independent, additive manner (P ≤ .05); thus, glucose tolerance and obesity attenuate the incretin effect on beta-cell function and GLP-1 response independently of each other.

Exogenous GLP-1 has been shown to restore the regulation of blood glucose to near-normal concentrations in patients with T2DM.27 Several studies of patients with T2DM have shown that synthetic GLP-1 administration induces insulin secretion,19,27 slows gastric emptying (which is accelerated in patients with T2DM), and decreases inappropriately elevated glucagon secretion.19,23,28 Acute GLP-1 infusion studies showed that GLP-1 improved fasting plasma glucose (FPG) and PPG concentrations23,27; long-term studies showed that this hormone exerts euglycemic effects, leading to improvements in glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c), and induces weight loss.29

 

 

TARGETING FUNDAMENTAL DEFECTS OF T2DM WITH INCRETIN-BASED THERAPIES

Recognition and a better understanding of the role of the incretins and the enzyme involved in their degradation have led to the development of two incretin-based treatments: the GLP-1 receptor agonists, which possess many of the glucoregulatory actions of incretin peptides, and the DPP-4 inhibitors.5 Both the GLP-1 receptor agonists and the DPP-4 inhibitors have demonstrated safety and efficacy in the management of hyperglycemia in patients with T2DM.

GLP-1 receptor agonists

The GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide is a synthetic form of exendin-4 and has a unique amino acid sequence that renders it resistant to degradation by DPP-4, making its actions longer lasting than endogenous GLP-1.5,30 Exenatide has a half-life of 2.4 hours and is detectable for up to 10 hours after subcutaneous (SC) injection.5,30 It is administered BID and has been approved as monotherapy or an adjunct therapy in patients with T2DM who have inadequate glycemic control following treatment with metformin, a sulfonylurea, a thiazolidinedione (TZD), or metformin in combination with a sulfonylurea or a TZD.31–35

In both human and animal studies, exenatide has been shown to enhance glucose-dependent insulin secretion and suppress inappropriate glucagon secretion in a glucose-dependent manner, reduce food intake and body weight, and acutely improve beta-cell function by enhancing first- and second-phase insulin secretion.5,36,37

In a small study involving 17 patients with T2DM, exenatide was shown to slow gastric emptying, which could be an important mechanism contributing to its beneficial effects on PPG concentration.38 Exenatide also has been shown to attenuate postprandial hyper­glycemia, a risk factor for cardiovascular disease (CVD),  by reducing endogenous glucose production by about 50% in patients with T2DM.39 Another mechanism for glycemic control may exist, as a recent animal study has shown that exenatide, similar to endogenous GLP-1, lowers blood glucose concentration independent of changes in pancreatic islet hormone secretion or delayed gastric emptying.40

A formulation of exenatide that is administered once weekly—exenatide long-acting release (LAR)—is in clinical evaluation and under review by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA). In a short-term study, exenatide-LAR (0.8 mg or 2.0 mg) was administered once weekly for 15 weeks to patients with T2DM whose glycemia was suboptimally controlled with metformin alone or in combination with diet and exercise. Compared with placebo, treatment with exenatide once weekly was associated with markedly reduced HbA1c, FPG, PPG and body weight.41 In a larger, 30-week, phase 3 trial, Diabetes Therapy Utilization: Researching Changes in A1C, Weight and Other Factors Through Intervention with Exenatide ONce Weekly (DURATION-1), exenatide-LAR 2 mg once weekly was compared with exenatide 10 mg BID in patients with T2DM. Exenatide-LAR once weekly was associated with a significantly greater reduction in HbA1c (–1.9% vs –1.5%, P = .0023), and with a similar low risk of hypoglycemia and reduction in body weight (–3.7 kg vs –3.6 kg, P = .89) compared with the BID formulation.42

Liraglutide, recently approved in the European Union for T2DM and also under regulatory review in the United States, is a DPP-4–resistant human analogue GLP-1 receptor agonist in clinical development that has a 97% homology to native GLP-1.43–45 In contrast to exenatide, the acetylated liraglutide molecule allows binding to serum albumin and provides resistance to DPP-4 degradation, thus prolonging the half-life of liraglutide to approximately 12 hours. Liraglutide is administered SC QD as monotherapy or in combination with other antidiabetes agents such as metformin or sulfonylurea to patients with T2DM.44–47 Liraglutide has been shown to reduce HbA1c, decrease body weight, and lead to a lower incidence of hypoglycemia compared with the sulfonylurea glimepiride.

DPP-4 inhibitors

Sitagliptin is a DPP-4 inhibitor indicated as monotherapy or in combination with metformin or a TZD in patients with T2DM with inadequate glycemic control.48–51 Given orally, sitagliptin does not bind to the GLP-1 receptor agonist and has been shown to inhibit circulating DPP-4 activity by about 80%.52,53 Sitagliptin has been associated with an approximate twofold increase in postprandial GLP-1 plasma concentrations compared with placebo in healthy human subjects and in patients with T2DM.53 Saxagliptin, another potent DPP-4 inhibitor, significantly reduced HbA1c and FPG concentrations in patients with T2DM54 with a neutral effect on weight; it was recently approved by the FDA for treatment of T2DM.55

The DPP-4 inhibitor vildagliptin is currently being used in the European Union and Latin America but has yet to receive regulatory approval in the United States.54 Alogliptin, a novel, high-affinity, high-specificity DPP-4 inhibitor currently in development, provides rapid and sustained DPP-4 inhibition and significantly reduces HbA1c, FPG, and PPG concentrations with no change in body weight in patients with T2DM.56,57

Incretin-based therapies compared

In a recent head-to-head crossover trial between the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide and the DPP-4 inhibitor sitagliptin, exenatide had a greater effect in reducing 2-hour PPG.52 Patients with T2DM who switched from sitagliptin to exenatide showed a further reduction in 2-hour PPG concentration. Exenatide was also more potent than sitagliptin in increasing insulin secretion, reducing postprandial glucagon secretion, and decreasing triglycerides.52 Finally, exenatide slowed gastric emptying and reduced caloric intake. The differences between the two incretin-based therapies and their effects on glycemic control could be attributed to the pharmacologic concentration of the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide that is available for GLP-1 receptor activation compared with the twofold rise in endogenous GLP-1 concentration seen with the DPP-4 inhibitor sitagliptin.52

A comparison of the actions of the GLP-1 receptor agonists and DPP-4 inhibitors in patients with T2DM is provided in Table 1,52,58 and an overview of incretin-based therapies is presented in Table 2.45,54,59 GLP-1 receptor agonists induce weight loss in patients with T2DM, while DPP-4 inhibitors are weight neutral.3,52,58,60 The GLP-1 receptor agonists are associated with a much higher incidence of adverse GI effects such as nausea and vomiting, presumably also attributable to the pharmacologic levels achieved.

 

 

Effects of incretin-based therapies

The number of people with T2DM, overweight/obesity, or CVD, alone or in combination, is approaching epidemic proportions, with the mechanisms of these conditions interrelated. Approximately 24 million Americans have diabetes, and T2DM accounts for more than 90% of these cases.61 Most patients with T2DM are not achieving HbA1c targets.62–64 About 60% of deaths among patients with T2DM are caused by CVD.65 Compounding the problem, overweight/obesity enhances the risk for CV-related morbidities in patients with diabetes.66 A cluster of metabolic disorders referred to as the metabolic syndrome (which includes hyperglycemia, measures of central obesity, and a series of significant CV risk factors) is common in patients with T2DM and CVD.67 Unfortunately, many antidiabetes drugs that successfully manage glycemic control also cause weight gain, which in theory may increase CV risk in patients with T2DM.68

Data from studies of patients with T2DM show that exenatide improves glycemic control and reduces body weight. Exenatide administered BID significantly reduced HbA1c (–0.40% to –0.86%) and weight (–1.6 kg to –2.8 kg) relative to baseline in three 30-week, placebo-controlled clinical trials.31,33,34 In subsequent 2-year, open-label extension studies, exenatide produced significant reductions from baseline in HbA1c (–20.9% at 30 weeks) and weight (–2.1 kg at 30 weeks). Both decreases were sustained through 2 years (HbA1c –1.1%, weight –4.7 kg) with a low incidence of hypoglycemia.31 Further post hoc analysis of the open-label extension of the 30-week trials followed patients treated with exenatide BID for 3 years or longer.69 In addition to markedly decreasing HbA1c from baseline levels (–1.1% at 3 years and –0.8% at up to 3.5 years; P < .0001), adjunctive exenatide produced significant reductions in body weight—up to –5.3 kg after 3.5 years of therapy.31,69 At 3.5 years, continued exenatide therapy resulted in a –6% reduction in low-density lipoprotein cholesterol, a 24% mean increase in high-density lipoprotein cholesterol, and a mean reduction in blood pressure of –2% to –4% from baseline levels. Improvements in hepatic biomarkers and homeostasis model assessment-B, a measure of beta-cell function, were seen after 2 and 3 years of exenatide treatment.31 Hypoglycemia was generally mild and transient.

In comparative head-to-head studies, exenatide BID and insulin analogues reduced HbA1c by similar magnitudes; yet exenatide treatment resulted in better control in terms of PPG and weight loss, while insulin glargine and insulin aspart produced weight gain.70–73

Mechanisms of cardioprotective effects

Although the mechanisms for the potential cardioprotective effects of GLP-1 and its receptor agonists remain to be fully elucidated, a recent study suggested that two novel pathways could be involved—one that is dependent on the known GLP-1 receptor pathway, and one that is independent of the GLP-1 receptor pathway.74 Correlating with observations of a potential cardioprotective effect, an infusion of recombinant GLP-1 in patients with acute myocardial infarction, when added to standard therapy, resulted in improved left ventricular function and was associated with reduced mortality.75 Evidence continues to accumulate for potential cardioprotective effects of the GLP-1 receptor agonists, indicating that they may have a positive impact on macro­vascular complications in patients with T2DM.

CONCLUSION

T2DM, which is often associated with overweight and obesity, remains a significant challenge worldwide. The broad spectrum of glucoregulatory actions of the incretin hormones GLP-1 and GIP, and their importance in maintaining glucose homeostasis, have been recognized and correlated with the pathogenesis of T2DM. An improved understanding of the roles played by GLP-1 and GIP in the pathogenesis of T2DM may provide clinicians with important details regarding the therapeutic application of incretin-based therapies, including the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide and the DPP-4 inhibitors sitagliptin and saxagliptin. Antidiabetes agents whose development is based on the multiple pharmacologic effects of incretin hormones can address the multifaceted nature of T2DM and overcome some current limitations of traditional therapies, especially those related to weight. This becomes more compelling given the close link among T2DM, obesity, and increased CV risk.

References
  1. Boyle PJ, Freeman JS. Application of incretin mimetics and dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors in managing type 2 diabetes mellitus. J Am Osteopath Assoc 2007; 107(suppl 3):S10–S16.
  2. Freeman JS. The pathophysiologic role of incretins. J Am Osteopath Assoc 2007; 107(suppl 3):S6–S9.
  3. Drucker DJ, Nauck MA. The incretin system: glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists and dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitors in type 2 diabetes. Lancet 2006; 368:1696–1705.
  4. Nauck MA, Baller B, Meier JJ. Gastric inhibitory polypeptide and glucagon-like peptide-1 in the pathogenesis of type 2 diabetes. Diabetes 2004; 53(suppl 3):S190–S196.
  5. Stonehouse A, Okerson T, Kendall D, Maggs D. Emerging incretin based therapies for type 2 diabetes: incretin mimetics and DPP-4 inhibitors. Curr Diabetes Rev 2008; 4:101–109.
  6. Huda MS, Wilding JP, Pinkney JH. Gut peptides and the regulation of appetite. Obes Rev 2006; 7:163–182.
  7. Elrick H, Stimmler L, Hlad CJ Jr, Arai Y. Plasma insulin response to oral and intravenous glucose administration. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1964; 24:1076–1082.
  8. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ. Biology of incretins: GLP-1 and GIP. Gastroenterology 2007; 132:2131–2157.
  9. Brown JC, Dryburgh JR, Ross SA, Dupré J. Identification and actions of gastric inhibitory polypeptide. Recent Prog Horm Res 1975; 31:487–532.
  10. Kreymann B, Williams G, Ghatei MA, Bloom SR. Glucagon-like peptide-1 7-36: a physiological incretin in man. Lancet 1987; 2:1300–1304.
  11. Nauck MA, Homberger E, Siegel EG, et al. Incretin effects of increasing glucose loads in man calculated from venous insulin and C-peptide responses. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1986; 63:492–498.
  12. Farilla L, Bulotta A, Hirshberg B, et al. Glucagon-like peptide 1 inhibits cell apoptosis and improves glucose responsiveness of freshly isolated human islets. Endocrinology 2003; 144:5149–5158.
  13. Van Gaal LF, Gutkin SW, Nauck MA. Exploiting the antidiabetic properties of incretins to treat type 2 diabetes mellitus: glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor agonists or insulin for patients with inadequate glycemic control? Eur J Endocrinol 2008; 158:773–784.
  14. Deacon CF, Nauck MA, Toft-Nielsen M, Pridal L, Willms B, Holst JJ. Both subcutaneously and intravenously administered glucagon-like peptide I are rapidly degraded from the NH2-terminus in type II diabetic patients and in healthy subjects. Diabetes 1995; 44:1126–1131.
  15. Dai H, Gustavson SM, Preston GM, Eskra JD, Calle R, Hirshberg B. Non-linear increase in GLP-1 levels in response to DPP-IV inhibition in healthy adult subjects. Diabetes Obes Metab 2008; 10:506–513.
  16. Nauck MA, Stöckmann F, Ebert R, Creutzfeldt W. Reduced incretin effect in type 2 (non-insulin-dependent) diabetes. Diabetologia 1986; 29:46–52.
  17. Phillips WT, Schwartz JG, McMahan CA. Rapid gastric emptying of an oral glucose solution in type 2 diabetic patients. J Nucl Med 1992; 33:1496–1500.
  18. Toft-Nielsen MB, Damholt MB, Madsbad S, et al. Determinants of the impaired secretion of glucagon-like peptide-1 in type 2 diabetic patients. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2001; 86:3717–3723.
  19. Nauck MA, Heimesaat MM, Orskov C, Holst JJ, Ebert R, Creutzfeldt W. Preserved incretin activity of glucagon-like peptide 1 [7-36 amide] but not of synthetic human gastric inhibitory polypeptide in patients with type-2 diabetes mellitus. J Clin Invest 1993; 91:301–307.
  20. Lynn FC, Thompson SA, Pospisilik JA, et al. A novel pathway for regulation of glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP) receptor expression in beta cells. FASEB J 2003; 17:91–93.
  21. Vaag AA, Holst JJ, Vølund A, Beck-Nielsen HB. Gut incretin hormones in identical twins discordant for non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM)—evidence for decreased glucagon-like peptide-1 secretion during oral glucose ingestion in NIDDM twins. Eur J Endocrinol 1996; 135:425–432.
  22. Meier JJ, Gallwitz B, Salmen S, et al. Normalization of glucose concentrations and deceleration of gastric emptying after solid meals during intravenous glucagon-like peptide 1 in patients with type 2 diabetes. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2003; 88:2719–2725.
  23. Nauck MA, Kleine N, Orskov C, Holst JJ, Willms B, Creutzfeldt W. Normalization of fasting hyperglycaemia by exogenous glucagon-like peptide 1 (7-36 amide) in type 2 (non-insulin-dependent) diabetic patients. Diabetologia 1993; 36:741–744.
  24. Knop FK, Vilsbøll T, Højberg PV, et al. Reduced incretin effect in type 2 diabetes: cause or consequence of the diabetic state? Diabetes 2007; 56:1951–1959.
  25. Lee YS, Shin S, Shigihara T, et al. Glucagon-like peptide-1 gene therapy in obese diabetic mice results in long-term cure of diabetes by improving insulin sensitivity and reducing hepatic gluconeogenesis. Diabetes 2007; 56:1671–1679.
  26. Muscelli E, Mari A, Casolaro A, et al. Separate impact of obesity and glucose tolerance on the incretin effect in normal subjects and type 2 diabetic patients. Diabetes 2008; 57:1340–1348.
  27. Nathan DM, Schreiber E, Fogel H, Mojsov S, Habener JF. Insulinotropic action of glucagonlike peptide-I-(7-37) in diabetic and nondiabetic subjects. Diabetes Care 1992; 15:270–276.
  28. Kolterman OG, Buse JB, Fineman MS, et al. Synthetic exendin-4 (exenatide) significantly reduces postprandial and fasting plasma glucose in subjects with type 2 diabetes. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2003; 88:3082–3089.
  29. Zander M, Madsbad S, Madsen JL, Holst JJ. Effect of 6-week course of glucagon-like peptide 1 on glycaemic control, insulin sensitivity, and beta-cell function in type 2 diabetes: a parallel-group study. Lancet 2002; 359:824–830.
  30. Kolterman OG, Kim DD, Shen L, et al. Pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, and safety of exenatide in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. Am J Health Syst Pharm 2005; 62:173–181.
  31. Buse JB, Henry RR, Han J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in sulfonylurea-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2628–2635.
  32. Byetta [package insert]. San Diego, CA: Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc.; 2009.
  33. DeFronzo RA, Ratner RE, Han J, Kim DD, Fineman MS, Baron AD. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control and weight over 30 weeks in metformin-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1092–1100.
  34. Kendall DM, Riddle MC, Rosenstock J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes treated with metformin and a sulfonylurea. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1083–1091.
  35. Zinman B, Hoogwerf BJ, Durán García S, et al. The effect of adding exenatide to a thiazolidinedione in suboptimally controlled type 2 diabetes: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2007; 146:477–485.
  36. Fehse F, Trautmann M, Holst JJ, et al. Exenatide augments first- and second-phase insulin secretion in response to intravenous glucose in subjects with type 2 diabetes. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2005; 90:5991–5997.
  37. Parkes DG, Pittner R, Jodka C, Smith P, Young A. Insulinotropic actions of exendin-4 and glucagon-like peptide-1 in vivo and in vitro. Metabolism 2001; 50:583–589.
  38. Linnebjerg H, Park S, Kothare PA, et al. Effect of exenatide on gastric emptying and relationship to postprandial glycemia in type 2 diabetes. Regul Pept 2008; 151:123–129.
  39. Cervera A, Wajcberg E, Sriwijitkamol A, et al. Mechanism of action of exenatide to reduce postprandial hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 2008; 294:E846–E852.
  40. Ionut V, Zheng D, Stefanovski D, Bergman RN. Exenatide can reduce glucose independent of islet hormones or gastric emptying. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 2008; 295:E269–E277.
  41. Kim D, MacConell L, Zhuang D, et al. Effects of once-weekly dosing of a long-acting release formulation of exenatide on glucose control and body weight in subjects with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2007; 30:1487–1493.
  42. Drucker DJ, Buse JB, Taylor K, et al. Exenatide once weekly versus twice daily for the treatment of type 2 diabetes: a randomised, open-label, non-inferiority study. Lancet 2008; 372:1240–1250.
  43. Knudsen LB, Nielsen PF, Huusfeldt PO, et al. Potent derivatives of glucagon-like peptide-1 with pharmacokinetic properties suitable for once daily administration. J Med Chem 2000; 43:1664–1669.
  44. Nauck M, Frid A, Hermansen K, et al; for the LEAD-2 Study Group. Efficacy and safety comparison of liraglutide, glimepiride, and placebo, all in combination with metformin, in type 2 diabetes: the LEAD (liraglutide effect and action in diabetes)-2 study. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:84–90.
  45. Committee for Medicinal Products for Human Use: Summary of Positive Opinion for Victoza. European Medicines Agency Web site. http://www.emea.europa.eu/pdfs/human/opinion/Victoza_14168909en.pdf. Published April 23, 2009. Accessed September 21, 2009.
  46. Garber A, Henry R, Ratner R, et al. Liraglutide versus glimepiride monotherapy for type 2 diabetes (LEAD-3 Mono): a randomised, 52-week, phase III, double-blind, parallel-treatment trial. Lancet 2009; 373:473–481.
  47. Marre M, Shaw J, Brändle M, et al. Liraglutide, a once-daily human GLP-1 analogue, added to a sulphonylurea over 26 weeks produces greater improvements in glycaemic and weight control compared with adding rosiglitazone or placebo in subjects with type 2 diabetes (LEAD-1 SU). Diabet Med 2009; 26:268–278.
  48. Aschner P, Kipnes MS, Lunceford JK, et al; for the Sitagliptin 021 Study Group. Effect of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy on glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2632–2637.
  49. Charbonnel B, Karasik A, Liu J, Wu M, Meininger G; for the Sitagliptin Study 020 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin added to ongoing metformin therapy in patients with type 2 diabetes inadequately controlled with metformin alone. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2638–2643.
  50. Raz I, Hanefeld M, Xu L, et al. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. Diabetologia 2006; 49:2564–2571.
  51. Rosenstock J, Brazg R, Andryuk PJ, Lu K, Stein P; for the Sitagliptin Study 019 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin added to ongoing pioglitazone therapy in patients with type 2 diabetes: a 24-week, multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, parallel-group study. Clin Ther 2006; 28:1556–1568.
  52. DeFronzo RA, Okerson T, Viswanathan P, Guan X, Holcombe JH, MacConell L. Effects of exenatide versus sitagliptin on postprandial glucose, insulin and glucagon secretion, gastric emptying, and caloric intake: a randomized, cross-over study. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:2943–2952.
  53. Herman GA, Stevens C, Van Dyck K, et al. Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of sitagliptin, an inhibitor of dipeptidyl peptidase IV, in healthy subjects: results from two randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled studies with single oral doses. Clin Pharmacol Ther 2005; 78:675–688.
  54. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ, Maida A, Lamont BJ. ADA 2008: incretin-based therapeutics. MedscapeCME Web site. http://www.medscape.com/viewprogram/15786. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  55. US Department of Health and Human Services. FDA approves new drug treatment for type 2 diabetes. US Food and Drug Administration Web site. http://www.fda.gov/newsevents/newsroom/pressannouncements/ucm174780.htm. Published July 31, 2009. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  56. Covington P, Christopher R, Davenport M, et al. Pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic, and tolerability profiles of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor alogliptin: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, multiple-dose study in adult patients with type 2 diabetes. Clin Ther 2008; 30:499–512.
  57. DeFronzo RA, Fleck PR, Wilson CA, Mekki Q; on behalf of the Alogliptin Study 010 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor alogliptin in patients with type 2 diabetes and inadequate glycemic control: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Diabetes Care 2008; 31:2315–2317.
  58. Triplitt CL, McGill JB, Porte D Jr, Conner CS. The changing landscape of type 2 diabetes: the role of incretin-based therapies in managed care outcomes. J Manag Care Pharm 2007; 13(9 suppl C):S2–S16.
  59. Garber AJ, Spann SJ. An overview of incretin clinical trials. J Fam Pract 2008; 57(9 suppl):S10–S18.
  60. Henry RR. Evolving concepts of type 2 diabetes management with oral medications: new approaches to an old disease. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:2189–2202.
  61. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. National diabetes fact sheet: general information and national estimates on diabetes in the United States, 2007. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention Web site. http://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/pubs/pdf/ndfs_2007.pdf. Published 2008. Accessed September 21, 2009.
  62. Ong KL, Cheung BM, Wong LY, Wt NM, Tan KC, Lam KS. Prevalence, treatment, and control of diagnosed diabetes in the U.S. National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey 1999–2004. Ann Epidemiol 2008; 18:222–229.
  63. Sanders CL, Yesupriya AJ, Curtin LR. Analysis of population structure and stratification in NHANES III self-reported race/ethnicities. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention Web site. http://www.cdc.gov/genomics/events/file/print/10year/08_pop_struct_ab.pdf. Accessed September 21, 2009.
  64. Koro CE, Bowlin SJ, Bourgeois N, Fedder DO. Glycemic control from 1988 to 2000 among US adults diagnosed with type 2 diabetes: a preliminary report. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:17–20.
  65. Haffner SM, Lehto S, Rönnemaa T, Pyörälä K, Laakso M. Mortality from coronary heart disease in subjects with type 2 diabetes and in nondiabetic subjects with and without prior myocardial infarction. N Engl J Med 1998; 339:229–234.
  66. Lloyd-Jones D, Adams R, Carnethon M, et al. Heart disease and stroke statistics—2009 update: a report from the American Heart Association Statistics Committee and Stroke Statistics Subcommittee. Circulation 2009; 119:480–486.
  67. Stonehouse AH, Holcombe JH, Kendall DM. GLP-1 analogues, DPP-IV inhibitors and the metabolic syndrome. In: Fonseca V, ed. Therapeutic Strategies in Metabolic Syndrome. Oxford, UK: Atlas Medical Publishing Ltd; 2008: 137–157.
  68. Purnell JQ, Weyer C. Weight effect of current and experimental drugs for diabetes mellitus: from promotion to alleviation of obesity. Treat Endocrinol 2003; 2:33–47.
  69. Klonoff DC, Buse JB, Nielsen LL, et al. Exenatide effects on diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular risk factors and hepatic biomarkers in patients with type 2 diabetes treated for at least 3 years. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:275–286.
  70. Barnett AH, Burger J, Johns D, et al. Tolerability and efficacy of exenatide and titrated insulin glargine in adult patients with type 2 diabetes previously uncontrolled with metformin or a sulfonylurea: a multinational, randomized, open-label, two-period, crossover noninferiority trial. Clin Ther 2007; 29:2333–2348.
  71. Glass LC, Qu Y, Lenox S, et al. Effects of exenatide versus insulin analogues on weight change in subjects with type 2 diabetes: a pooled post-hoc analysis. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:639–644.
  72. Heine RJ, Van Gaal LF, Johns D, Mihm MJ, Widel MH, Brodows RG; for the GWAA Study Group. Exenatide versus insulin glargine in patients with suboptimally controlled type 2 diabetes: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2005; 143:559–569.
  73. Nauck MA, Duran S, Kim D, et al. A comparison of twice-daily exenatide and biphasic insulin aspart in patients with type 2 diabetes who were suboptimally controlled with sulfonylurea and metformin: a non-inferiority study. Diabetologia 2007; 50:259–267.
  74. Ban K, Noyan-Ashraf MH, Hoefer J, Bolz SS, Drucker DJ, Husain M. Cardioprotective and vasodilatory actions of glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor are mediated through both glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor-dependent and -independent pathways. Circulation 2008; 117:2340–2350.
  75. Nikolaidis LA, Mankad S, Sokos GG, et al. Effects of glucagon-like peptide-1 in patients with acute myocardial infarction and left ventricular dysfunction after successful reperfusion. Circulation 2004; 109:962–965.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Jeffrey S. Freeman, DO
Professor of Internal Medicine and Chairman, Division of Endocrinology and Metabolism, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, Philadelphia, PA

Correspondence: Jeffrey S. Freeman, DO, Professor of Internal Medicine and Chairman, Division of Endocrinology and Metabolism, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, 4190 City Ave., Suite 324, Philadelphia, PA 19131-1626; [email protected]

Dr. Freeman reported that he has received speakers’ bureau fees from Glaxo­SmithKline, Merck & Co., Inc., and Novo Nordisk Inc. He reported that he did not receive an honorarium for writing this article.

Dr. Freeman reported that he wrote this article and received no assistance with content development from unnamed contributors. He reported that BlueSpark Healthcare Communications, a medical communications company, assisted with preliminary literature searches, reference verification, proofing for grammar and style, table and figure rendering based on author instructions, copyright permission requests, and identification of topical overlap with other manuscripts in this supplement.

Publications
Page Number
S12-S19
Author and Disclosure Information

Jeffrey S. Freeman, DO
Professor of Internal Medicine and Chairman, Division of Endocrinology and Metabolism, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, Philadelphia, PA

Correspondence: Jeffrey S. Freeman, DO, Professor of Internal Medicine and Chairman, Division of Endocrinology and Metabolism, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, 4190 City Ave., Suite 324, Philadelphia, PA 19131-1626; [email protected]

Dr. Freeman reported that he has received speakers’ bureau fees from Glaxo­SmithKline, Merck & Co., Inc., and Novo Nordisk Inc. He reported that he did not receive an honorarium for writing this article.

Dr. Freeman reported that he wrote this article and received no assistance with content development from unnamed contributors. He reported that BlueSpark Healthcare Communications, a medical communications company, assisted with preliminary literature searches, reference verification, proofing for grammar and style, table and figure rendering based on author instructions, copyright permission requests, and identification of topical overlap with other manuscripts in this supplement.

Author and Disclosure Information

Jeffrey S. Freeman, DO
Professor of Internal Medicine and Chairman, Division of Endocrinology and Metabolism, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, Philadelphia, PA

Correspondence: Jeffrey S. Freeman, DO, Professor of Internal Medicine and Chairman, Division of Endocrinology and Metabolism, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, 4190 City Ave., Suite 324, Philadelphia, PA 19131-1626; [email protected]

Dr. Freeman reported that he has received speakers’ bureau fees from Glaxo­SmithKline, Merck & Co., Inc., and Novo Nordisk Inc. He reported that he did not receive an honorarium for writing this article.

Dr. Freeman reported that he wrote this article and received no assistance with content development from unnamed contributors. He reported that BlueSpark Healthcare Communications, a medical communications company, assisted with preliminary literature searches, reference verification, proofing for grammar and style, table and figure rendering based on author instructions, copyright permission requests, and identification of topical overlap with other manuscripts in this supplement.

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

It has long been understood that the pathophysiology of type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM) is based on the triad of progressive decline in insulin-producing pancreatic beta cells, an increase in insulin resistance, and increased hepatic glucose production.1,2 It is now evident that other factors, including defective actions of the gastrointestinal (GI) incretin hormones glucagon-like peptide–1 (GLP-1) and glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP), also play significant roles.2–5 The uncontrolled hyperglycemia resulting from such defects may lead to microvascular complications, including retinopathy, neuropathy, microangiopathy, and nephropathy, and macrovascular complications, such as coronary artery disease and peripheral vascular disease.

This review explores the growing understanding of the role of the incretins in normal insulin secretion, as well as in the pathogenesis of T2DM, and examines the pathophysiologic basis for the benefits and therapeutic application of incretin-based therapies in T2DM.1,2

THE GI SYSTEM AND GLUCOSE HOMEOSTASIS IN THE HEALTHY STATE

The GI system plays an integral role in glucose homeostasis.6 The observation that orally administered glucose provides a stronger insulinotropic stimulus than an intravenous glucose challenge provided insight into the regulation of plasma glucose by the GI system of healthy individuals.7 The incretin effect, as this is termed, may be responsible for 50% to 70% of the total insulin secreted following oral glucose intake.8

Two GI peptide hormones (the incretins)—GLP-1 and GIP—were found to exert major glucoregulatory actions.3,9,10 Within minutes of nutrient ingestion, GLP-1 is secreted from intestinal L cells in the distal ileum and colon, while GIP is released by intestinal K cells in the duodenum and jejunum.3 GLP-1 and GIP trigger their insulinotropic actions by binding beta-cell receptors.3 GLP-1 receptors are expressed on pancreatic glucagon-containing alpha and delta cells as well as on beta cells, whereas GIP receptors are expressed primarily on beta cells.3,8 GLP-1 receptors are also expressed in the central nervous system (CNS), peripheral nervous system, lung, heart, and GI tract, while GIP receptors are expressed in adipose tissue and the CNS.3 GLP-1 inhibits glucose-dependent glucagon secretion from alpha cells.3 In healthy individuals, fasting glucose is managed by tonic insulin/glucagon secretion, but excursions of postprandial glucose (PPG) are controlled by insulin and the incretin hormones.11

Additionally, in animal studies, GLP-1 has been shown to induce the transcriptional activation of the insulin gene and insulin biosynthesis, thus increasing beta-cell proliferation and decreasing beta-cell apoptosis.12 GLP-1 stimulates a CNS-mediated pathway of insulin secretion, slows gastric emptying, increases CNS-mediated satiety leading to reduced food intake, indirectly increases insulin sensitivity and nutrient uptake in skeletal muscle and adipose tissue, and exerts neuroprotective effects.8

Reprinted, with permission, from European Journal of Endocrinology (Van Gaal LF, et al. Eur J Endocrinol 2008; 158:773–784),13 Copyright © 2008 European Society of Endocrinology.
Figure 1. Biologic actions of GIP and GLP-1 in relation to the pathophysiology of type 2 diabetes mellitus. GIP = glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide, GLP-1 = glucagon-like peptide–1; PP = postprandial; solid arrows = potentially beneficial actions; dashed arrows = potentially harmful actions; slashed arrows = actions with no effect.
Along with its insulinotropic action, GIP has been shown in animal studies to inhibit gastric acid secretion, bioregulate fat metabolism in adipocytes, increase glucagon secretion and fat deposition, increase beta-cell replication, and decrease beta-cell apoptosis.8Figure 1 illustrates the biologic actions of GLP-1 and GIP.13

Both GLP-1 and GIP are rapidly degraded by the serine protease dipeptidyl peptidase–4 (DPP-4), which is widely expressed in bound and free forms.14 A recent study in healthy adults showed that GLP-1 concentration declined even during maximal DPP-4 inhibition, suggesting that there may be pathways of GLP-1 elimination other than DPP-4 enzymatic degradation.15

INCRETINS AND THE PATHOGENESIS OF T2DM

Studies have shown that incretin pathways play a role in the progression of T2DM.3,16 The significant reduction in the incretin effect seen in patients with T2DM has been attributed to several factors, including impaired secretion of GLP-1, accelerated metabolism of GLP-1 and GIP, and defective responsiveness to both hormones.16 Many patients with T2DM also have accelerated gastric emptying that may contribute to deterioration of their glycemic control.17

While GIP concentration is normal or modestly increased in patients with T2DM,16,18 the insulinotropic actions of GIP are significantly diminished.19 Thus, patients with T2DM have an impaired responsiveness to GIP with a possible link to GIP-receptor downregulation or desensitization.20

Are secretory defects a cause or result of T2DM?

In contrast to GIP, the secretion of GLP-1 has been shown to be deficient in patients with T2DM.18 As with GIP, it is unknown to what degree this defect is a cause or consequence of T2DM. In a study of identical twins, defective GLP-1 secretion was observed only in the one sibling with T2DM, suggesting that GLP-1 secretory deficits may be secondary to the development of T2DM.21 Despite the diminished secretion of GLP-1 in patients with T2DM, the insulinotropic actions of GLP-1 are preserved.19 It has also been shown that the effects of GLP-1 on gastric emptying and glucagon secretion are maintained in patients with T2DM.19,22,23

Whether this incretin dysregulation is responsible for or is the end result of hyperglycemia remains a subject of continued investigation. A recent study confirmed that the incretin effect is reduced in patients with T2DM, but advanced the concept that it may be a consequence of the diabetic state.16,24 Notably, impaired actions of GLP-1 and GIP and diminished concentrations of GLP-1 may be partially restored by improved glycemic control.24

Recent preclinical and clinical studies continue to clarify the roles of incretin hormones in T2DM. The findings from a study of obese diabetic mice suggest that the effect of GLP-1 therapy on the long-term remission of diabetes may be caused by improvements in beta-cell function and insulin sensitivity, as well as by a reduction in gluconeogenesis in the liver.25

Incretin effect and glucose tolerance, body mass index

Another study was conducted to evaluate quantitatively the separate impacts of obesity and hyperglycemia on the incretin effect in patients with T2DM, patients with impaired glucose tolerance, and patients with normal glucose tolerance.26 There was a significant (P ≤ .05) reduction in the incretin effect in terms of total insulin secretion, beta-cell glucose sensitivity, and the GLP-1 response to oral glucose in patients with T2DM compared with individuals whose glucose tolerance was normal or impaired. Each manifestation of the incretin effect was inversely related to both glucose tolerance and body mass index in an independent, additive manner (P ≤ .05); thus, glucose tolerance and obesity attenuate the incretin effect on beta-cell function and GLP-1 response independently of each other.

Exogenous GLP-1 has been shown to restore the regulation of blood glucose to near-normal concentrations in patients with T2DM.27 Several studies of patients with T2DM have shown that synthetic GLP-1 administration induces insulin secretion,19,27 slows gastric emptying (which is accelerated in patients with T2DM), and decreases inappropriately elevated glucagon secretion.19,23,28 Acute GLP-1 infusion studies showed that GLP-1 improved fasting plasma glucose (FPG) and PPG concentrations23,27; long-term studies showed that this hormone exerts euglycemic effects, leading to improvements in glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c), and induces weight loss.29

 

 

TARGETING FUNDAMENTAL DEFECTS OF T2DM WITH INCRETIN-BASED THERAPIES

Recognition and a better understanding of the role of the incretins and the enzyme involved in their degradation have led to the development of two incretin-based treatments: the GLP-1 receptor agonists, which possess many of the glucoregulatory actions of incretin peptides, and the DPP-4 inhibitors.5 Both the GLP-1 receptor agonists and the DPP-4 inhibitors have demonstrated safety and efficacy in the management of hyperglycemia in patients with T2DM.

GLP-1 receptor agonists

The GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide is a synthetic form of exendin-4 and has a unique amino acid sequence that renders it resistant to degradation by DPP-4, making its actions longer lasting than endogenous GLP-1.5,30 Exenatide has a half-life of 2.4 hours and is detectable for up to 10 hours after subcutaneous (SC) injection.5,30 It is administered BID and has been approved as monotherapy or an adjunct therapy in patients with T2DM who have inadequate glycemic control following treatment with metformin, a sulfonylurea, a thiazolidinedione (TZD), or metformin in combination with a sulfonylurea or a TZD.31–35

In both human and animal studies, exenatide has been shown to enhance glucose-dependent insulin secretion and suppress inappropriate glucagon secretion in a glucose-dependent manner, reduce food intake and body weight, and acutely improve beta-cell function by enhancing first- and second-phase insulin secretion.5,36,37

In a small study involving 17 patients with T2DM, exenatide was shown to slow gastric emptying, which could be an important mechanism contributing to its beneficial effects on PPG concentration.38 Exenatide also has been shown to attenuate postprandial hyper­glycemia, a risk factor for cardiovascular disease (CVD),  by reducing endogenous glucose production by about 50% in patients with T2DM.39 Another mechanism for glycemic control may exist, as a recent animal study has shown that exenatide, similar to endogenous GLP-1, lowers blood glucose concentration independent of changes in pancreatic islet hormone secretion or delayed gastric emptying.40

A formulation of exenatide that is administered once weekly—exenatide long-acting release (LAR)—is in clinical evaluation and under review by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA). In a short-term study, exenatide-LAR (0.8 mg or 2.0 mg) was administered once weekly for 15 weeks to patients with T2DM whose glycemia was suboptimally controlled with metformin alone or in combination with diet and exercise. Compared with placebo, treatment with exenatide once weekly was associated with markedly reduced HbA1c, FPG, PPG and body weight.41 In a larger, 30-week, phase 3 trial, Diabetes Therapy Utilization: Researching Changes in A1C, Weight and Other Factors Through Intervention with Exenatide ONce Weekly (DURATION-1), exenatide-LAR 2 mg once weekly was compared with exenatide 10 mg BID in patients with T2DM. Exenatide-LAR once weekly was associated with a significantly greater reduction in HbA1c (–1.9% vs –1.5%, P = .0023), and with a similar low risk of hypoglycemia and reduction in body weight (–3.7 kg vs –3.6 kg, P = .89) compared with the BID formulation.42

Liraglutide, recently approved in the European Union for T2DM and also under regulatory review in the United States, is a DPP-4–resistant human analogue GLP-1 receptor agonist in clinical development that has a 97% homology to native GLP-1.43–45 In contrast to exenatide, the acetylated liraglutide molecule allows binding to serum albumin and provides resistance to DPP-4 degradation, thus prolonging the half-life of liraglutide to approximately 12 hours. Liraglutide is administered SC QD as monotherapy or in combination with other antidiabetes agents such as metformin or sulfonylurea to patients with T2DM.44–47 Liraglutide has been shown to reduce HbA1c, decrease body weight, and lead to a lower incidence of hypoglycemia compared with the sulfonylurea glimepiride.

DPP-4 inhibitors

Sitagliptin is a DPP-4 inhibitor indicated as monotherapy or in combination with metformin or a TZD in patients with T2DM with inadequate glycemic control.48–51 Given orally, sitagliptin does not bind to the GLP-1 receptor agonist and has been shown to inhibit circulating DPP-4 activity by about 80%.52,53 Sitagliptin has been associated with an approximate twofold increase in postprandial GLP-1 plasma concentrations compared with placebo in healthy human subjects and in patients with T2DM.53 Saxagliptin, another potent DPP-4 inhibitor, significantly reduced HbA1c and FPG concentrations in patients with T2DM54 with a neutral effect on weight; it was recently approved by the FDA for treatment of T2DM.55

The DPP-4 inhibitor vildagliptin is currently being used in the European Union and Latin America but has yet to receive regulatory approval in the United States.54 Alogliptin, a novel, high-affinity, high-specificity DPP-4 inhibitor currently in development, provides rapid and sustained DPP-4 inhibition and significantly reduces HbA1c, FPG, and PPG concentrations with no change in body weight in patients with T2DM.56,57

Incretin-based therapies compared

In a recent head-to-head crossover trial between the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide and the DPP-4 inhibitor sitagliptin, exenatide had a greater effect in reducing 2-hour PPG.52 Patients with T2DM who switched from sitagliptin to exenatide showed a further reduction in 2-hour PPG concentration. Exenatide was also more potent than sitagliptin in increasing insulin secretion, reducing postprandial glucagon secretion, and decreasing triglycerides.52 Finally, exenatide slowed gastric emptying and reduced caloric intake. The differences between the two incretin-based therapies and their effects on glycemic control could be attributed to the pharmacologic concentration of the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide that is available for GLP-1 receptor activation compared with the twofold rise in endogenous GLP-1 concentration seen with the DPP-4 inhibitor sitagliptin.52

A comparison of the actions of the GLP-1 receptor agonists and DPP-4 inhibitors in patients with T2DM is provided in Table 1,52,58 and an overview of incretin-based therapies is presented in Table 2.45,54,59 GLP-1 receptor agonists induce weight loss in patients with T2DM, while DPP-4 inhibitors are weight neutral.3,52,58,60 The GLP-1 receptor agonists are associated with a much higher incidence of adverse GI effects such as nausea and vomiting, presumably also attributable to the pharmacologic levels achieved.

 

 

Effects of incretin-based therapies

The number of people with T2DM, overweight/obesity, or CVD, alone or in combination, is approaching epidemic proportions, with the mechanisms of these conditions interrelated. Approximately 24 million Americans have diabetes, and T2DM accounts for more than 90% of these cases.61 Most patients with T2DM are not achieving HbA1c targets.62–64 About 60% of deaths among patients with T2DM are caused by CVD.65 Compounding the problem, overweight/obesity enhances the risk for CV-related morbidities in patients with diabetes.66 A cluster of metabolic disorders referred to as the metabolic syndrome (which includes hyperglycemia, measures of central obesity, and a series of significant CV risk factors) is common in patients with T2DM and CVD.67 Unfortunately, many antidiabetes drugs that successfully manage glycemic control also cause weight gain, which in theory may increase CV risk in patients with T2DM.68

Data from studies of patients with T2DM show that exenatide improves glycemic control and reduces body weight. Exenatide administered BID significantly reduced HbA1c (–0.40% to –0.86%) and weight (–1.6 kg to –2.8 kg) relative to baseline in three 30-week, placebo-controlled clinical trials.31,33,34 In subsequent 2-year, open-label extension studies, exenatide produced significant reductions from baseline in HbA1c (–20.9% at 30 weeks) and weight (–2.1 kg at 30 weeks). Both decreases were sustained through 2 years (HbA1c –1.1%, weight –4.7 kg) with a low incidence of hypoglycemia.31 Further post hoc analysis of the open-label extension of the 30-week trials followed patients treated with exenatide BID for 3 years or longer.69 In addition to markedly decreasing HbA1c from baseline levels (–1.1% at 3 years and –0.8% at up to 3.5 years; P < .0001), adjunctive exenatide produced significant reductions in body weight—up to –5.3 kg after 3.5 years of therapy.31,69 At 3.5 years, continued exenatide therapy resulted in a –6% reduction in low-density lipoprotein cholesterol, a 24% mean increase in high-density lipoprotein cholesterol, and a mean reduction in blood pressure of –2% to –4% from baseline levels. Improvements in hepatic biomarkers and homeostasis model assessment-B, a measure of beta-cell function, were seen after 2 and 3 years of exenatide treatment.31 Hypoglycemia was generally mild and transient.

In comparative head-to-head studies, exenatide BID and insulin analogues reduced HbA1c by similar magnitudes; yet exenatide treatment resulted in better control in terms of PPG and weight loss, while insulin glargine and insulin aspart produced weight gain.70–73

Mechanisms of cardioprotective effects

Although the mechanisms for the potential cardioprotective effects of GLP-1 and its receptor agonists remain to be fully elucidated, a recent study suggested that two novel pathways could be involved—one that is dependent on the known GLP-1 receptor pathway, and one that is independent of the GLP-1 receptor pathway.74 Correlating with observations of a potential cardioprotective effect, an infusion of recombinant GLP-1 in patients with acute myocardial infarction, when added to standard therapy, resulted in improved left ventricular function and was associated with reduced mortality.75 Evidence continues to accumulate for potential cardioprotective effects of the GLP-1 receptor agonists, indicating that they may have a positive impact on macro­vascular complications in patients with T2DM.

CONCLUSION

T2DM, which is often associated with overweight and obesity, remains a significant challenge worldwide. The broad spectrum of glucoregulatory actions of the incretin hormones GLP-1 and GIP, and their importance in maintaining glucose homeostasis, have been recognized and correlated with the pathogenesis of T2DM. An improved understanding of the roles played by GLP-1 and GIP in the pathogenesis of T2DM may provide clinicians with important details regarding the therapeutic application of incretin-based therapies, including the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide and the DPP-4 inhibitors sitagliptin and saxagliptin. Antidiabetes agents whose development is based on the multiple pharmacologic effects of incretin hormones can address the multifaceted nature of T2DM and overcome some current limitations of traditional therapies, especially those related to weight. This becomes more compelling given the close link among T2DM, obesity, and increased CV risk.

It has long been understood that the pathophysiology of type 2 diabetes mellitus (T2DM) is based on the triad of progressive decline in insulin-producing pancreatic beta cells, an increase in insulin resistance, and increased hepatic glucose production.1,2 It is now evident that other factors, including defective actions of the gastrointestinal (GI) incretin hormones glucagon-like peptide–1 (GLP-1) and glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP), also play significant roles.2–5 The uncontrolled hyperglycemia resulting from such defects may lead to microvascular complications, including retinopathy, neuropathy, microangiopathy, and nephropathy, and macrovascular complications, such as coronary artery disease and peripheral vascular disease.

This review explores the growing understanding of the role of the incretins in normal insulin secretion, as well as in the pathogenesis of T2DM, and examines the pathophysiologic basis for the benefits and therapeutic application of incretin-based therapies in T2DM.1,2

THE GI SYSTEM AND GLUCOSE HOMEOSTASIS IN THE HEALTHY STATE

The GI system plays an integral role in glucose homeostasis.6 The observation that orally administered glucose provides a stronger insulinotropic stimulus than an intravenous glucose challenge provided insight into the regulation of plasma glucose by the GI system of healthy individuals.7 The incretin effect, as this is termed, may be responsible for 50% to 70% of the total insulin secreted following oral glucose intake.8

Two GI peptide hormones (the incretins)—GLP-1 and GIP—were found to exert major glucoregulatory actions.3,9,10 Within minutes of nutrient ingestion, GLP-1 is secreted from intestinal L cells in the distal ileum and colon, while GIP is released by intestinal K cells in the duodenum and jejunum.3 GLP-1 and GIP trigger their insulinotropic actions by binding beta-cell receptors.3 GLP-1 receptors are expressed on pancreatic glucagon-containing alpha and delta cells as well as on beta cells, whereas GIP receptors are expressed primarily on beta cells.3,8 GLP-1 receptors are also expressed in the central nervous system (CNS), peripheral nervous system, lung, heart, and GI tract, while GIP receptors are expressed in adipose tissue and the CNS.3 GLP-1 inhibits glucose-dependent glucagon secretion from alpha cells.3 In healthy individuals, fasting glucose is managed by tonic insulin/glucagon secretion, but excursions of postprandial glucose (PPG) are controlled by insulin and the incretin hormones.11

Additionally, in animal studies, GLP-1 has been shown to induce the transcriptional activation of the insulin gene and insulin biosynthesis, thus increasing beta-cell proliferation and decreasing beta-cell apoptosis.12 GLP-1 stimulates a CNS-mediated pathway of insulin secretion, slows gastric emptying, increases CNS-mediated satiety leading to reduced food intake, indirectly increases insulin sensitivity and nutrient uptake in skeletal muscle and adipose tissue, and exerts neuroprotective effects.8

Reprinted, with permission, from European Journal of Endocrinology (Van Gaal LF, et al. Eur J Endocrinol 2008; 158:773–784),13 Copyright © 2008 European Society of Endocrinology.
Figure 1. Biologic actions of GIP and GLP-1 in relation to the pathophysiology of type 2 diabetes mellitus. GIP = glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide, GLP-1 = glucagon-like peptide–1; PP = postprandial; solid arrows = potentially beneficial actions; dashed arrows = potentially harmful actions; slashed arrows = actions with no effect.
Along with its insulinotropic action, GIP has been shown in animal studies to inhibit gastric acid secretion, bioregulate fat metabolism in adipocytes, increase glucagon secretion and fat deposition, increase beta-cell replication, and decrease beta-cell apoptosis.8Figure 1 illustrates the biologic actions of GLP-1 and GIP.13

Both GLP-1 and GIP are rapidly degraded by the serine protease dipeptidyl peptidase–4 (DPP-4), which is widely expressed in bound and free forms.14 A recent study in healthy adults showed that GLP-1 concentration declined even during maximal DPP-4 inhibition, suggesting that there may be pathways of GLP-1 elimination other than DPP-4 enzymatic degradation.15

INCRETINS AND THE PATHOGENESIS OF T2DM

Studies have shown that incretin pathways play a role in the progression of T2DM.3,16 The significant reduction in the incretin effect seen in patients with T2DM has been attributed to several factors, including impaired secretion of GLP-1, accelerated metabolism of GLP-1 and GIP, and defective responsiveness to both hormones.16 Many patients with T2DM also have accelerated gastric emptying that may contribute to deterioration of their glycemic control.17

While GIP concentration is normal or modestly increased in patients with T2DM,16,18 the insulinotropic actions of GIP are significantly diminished.19 Thus, patients with T2DM have an impaired responsiveness to GIP with a possible link to GIP-receptor downregulation or desensitization.20

Are secretory defects a cause or result of T2DM?

In contrast to GIP, the secretion of GLP-1 has been shown to be deficient in patients with T2DM.18 As with GIP, it is unknown to what degree this defect is a cause or consequence of T2DM. In a study of identical twins, defective GLP-1 secretion was observed only in the one sibling with T2DM, suggesting that GLP-1 secretory deficits may be secondary to the development of T2DM.21 Despite the diminished secretion of GLP-1 in patients with T2DM, the insulinotropic actions of GLP-1 are preserved.19 It has also been shown that the effects of GLP-1 on gastric emptying and glucagon secretion are maintained in patients with T2DM.19,22,23

Whether this incretin dysregulation is responsible for or is the end result of hyperglycemia remains a subject of continued investigation. A recent study confirmed that the incretin effect is reduced in patients with T2DM, but advanced the concept that it may be a consequence of the diabetic state.16,24 Notably, impaired actions of GLP-1 and GIP and diminished concentrations of GLP-1 may be partially restored by improved glycemic control.24

Recent preclinical and clinical studies continue to clarify the roles of incretin hormones in T2DM. The findings from a study of obese diabetic mice suggest that the effect of GLP-1 therapy on the long-term remission of diabetes may be caused by improvements in beta-cell function and insulin sensitivity, as well as by a reduction in gluconeogenesis in the liver.25

Incretin effect and glucose tolerance, body mass index

Another study was conducted to evaluate quantitatively the separate impacts of obesity and hyperglycemia on the incretin effect in patients with T2DM, patients with impaired glucose tolerance, and patients with normal glucose tolerance.26 There was a significant (P ≤ .05) reduction in the incretin effect in terms of total insulin secretion, beta-cell glucose sensitivity, and the GLP-1 response to oral glucose in patients with T2DM compared with individuals whose glucose tolerance was normal or impaired. Each manifestation of the incretin effect was inversely related to both glucose tolerance and body mass index in an independent, additive manner (P ≤ .05); thus, glucose tolerance and obesity attenuate the incretin effect on beta-cell function and GLP-1 response independently of each other.

Exogenous GLP-1 has been shown to restore the regulation of blood glucose to near-normal concentrations in patients with T2DM.27 Several studies of patients with T2DM have shown that synthetic GLP-1 administration induces insulin secretion,19,27 slows gastric emptying (which is accelerated in patients with T2DM), and decreases inappropriately elevated glucagon secretion.19,23,28 Acute GLP-1 infusion studies showed that GLP-1 improved fasting plasma glucose (FPG) and PPG concentrations23,27; long-term studies showed that this hormone exerts euglycemic effects, leading to improvements in glycosylated hemoglobin (HbA1c), and induces weight loss.29

 

 

TARGETING FUNDAMENTAL DEFECTS OF T2DM WITH INCRETIN-BASED THERAPIES

Recognition and a better understanding of the role of the incretins and the enzyme involved in their degradation have led to the development of two incretin-based treatments: the GLP-1 receptor agonists, which possess many of the glucoregulatory actions of incretin peptides, and the DPP-4 inhibitors.5 Both the GLP-1 receptor agonists and the DPP-4 inhibitors have demonstrated safety and efficacy in the management of hyperglycemia in patients with T2DM.

GLP-1 receptor agonists

The GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide is a synthetic form of exendin-4 and has a unique amino acid sequence that renders it resistant to degradation by DPP-4, making its actions longer lasting than endogenous GLP-1.5,30 Exenatide has a half-life of 2.4 hours and is detectable for up to 10 hours after subcutaneous (SC) injection.5,30 It is administered BID and has been approved as monotherapy or an adjunct therapy in patients with T2DM who have inadequate glycemic control following treatment with metformin, a sulfonylurea, a thiazolidinedione (TZD), or metformin in combination with a sulfonylurea or a TZD.31–35

In both human and animal studies, exenatide has been shown to enhance glucose-dependent insulin secretion and suppress inappropriate glucagon secretion in a glucose-dependent manner, reduce food intake and body weight, and acutely improve beta-cell function by enhancing first- and second-phase insulin secretion.5,36,37

In a small study involving 17 patients with T2DM, exenatide was shown to slow gastric emptying, which could be an important mechanism contributing to its beneficial effects on PPG concentration.38 Exenatide also has been shown to attenuate postprandial hyper­glycemia, a risk factor for cardiovascular disease (CVD),  by reducing endogenous glucose production by about 50% in patients with T2DM.39 Another mechanism for glycemic control may exist, as a recent animal study has shown that exenatide, similar to endogenous GLP-1, lowers blood glucose concentration independent of changes in pancreatic islet hormone secretion or delayed gastric emptying.40

A formulation of exenatide that is administered once weekly—exenatide long-acting release (LAR)—is in clinical evaluation and under review by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA). In a short-term study, exenatide-LAR (0.8 mg or 2.0 mg) was administered once weekly for 15 weeks to patients with T2DM whose glycemia was suboptimally controlled with metformin alone or in combination with diet and exercise. Compared with placebo, treatment with exenatide once weekly was associated with markedly reduced HbA1c, FPG, PPG and body weight.41 In a larger, 30-week, phase 3 trial, Diabetes Therapy Utilization: Researching Changes in A1C, Weight and Other Factors Through Intervention with Exenatide ONce Weekly (DURATION-1), exenatide-LAR 2 mg once weekly was compared with exenatide 10 mg BID in patients with T2DM. Exenatide-LAR once weekly was associated with a significantly greater reduction in HbA1c (–1.9% vs –1.5%, P = .0023), and with a similar low risk of hypoglycemia and reduction in body weight (–3.7 kg vs –3.6 kg, P = .89) compared with the BID formulation.42

Liraglutide, recently approved in the European Union for T2DM and also under regulatory review in the United States, is a DPP-4–resistant human analogue GLP-1 receptor agonist in clinical development that has a 97% homology to native GLP-1.43–45 In contrast to exenatide, the acetylated liraglutide molecule allows binding to serum albumin and provides resistance to DPP-4 degradation, thus prolonging the half-life of liraglutide to approximately 12 hours. Liraglutide is administered SC QD as monotherapy or in combination with other antidiabetes agents such as metformin or sulfonylurea to patients with T2DM.44–47 Liraglutide has been shown to reduce HbA1c, decrease body weight, and lead to a lower incidence of hypoglycemia compared with the sulfonylurea glimepiride.

DPP-4 inhibitors

Sitagliptin is a DPP-4 inhibitor indicated as monotherapy or in combination with metformin or a TZD in patients with T2DM with inadequate glycemic control.48–51 Given orally, sitagliptin does not bind to the GLP-1 receptor agonist and has been shown to inhibit circulating DPP-4 activity by about 80%.52,53 Sitagliptin has been associated with an approximate twofold increase in postprandial GLP-1 plasma concentrations compared with placebo in healthy human subjects and in patients with T2DM.53 Saxagliptin, another potent DPP-4 inhibitor, significantly reduced HbA1c and FPG concentrations in patients with T2DM54 with a neutral effect on weight; it was recently approved by the FDA for treatment of T2DM.55

The DPP-4 inhibitor vildagliptin is currently being used in the European Union and Latin America but has yet to receive regulatory approval in the United States.54 Alogliptin, a novel, high-affinity, high-specificity DPP-4 inhibitor currently in development, provides rapid and sustained DPP-4 inhibition and significantly reduces HbA1c, FPG, and PPG concentrations with no change in body weight in patients with T2DM.56,57

Incretin-based therapies compared

In a recent head-to-head crossover trial between the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide and the DPP-4 inhibitor sitagliptin, exenatide had a greater effect in reducing 2-hour PPG.52 Patients with T2DM who switched from sitagliptin to exenatide showed a further reduction in 2-hour PPG concentration. Exenatide was also more potent than sitagliptin in increasing insulin secretion, reducing postprandial glucagon secretion, and decreasing triglycerides.52 Finally, exenatide slowed gastric emptying and reduced caloric intake. The differences between the two incretin-based therapies and their effects on glycemic control could be attributed to the pharmacologic concentration of the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide that is available for GLP-1 receptor activation compared with the twofold rise in endogenous GLP-1 concentration seen with the DPP-4 inhibitor sitagliptin.52

A comparison of the actions of the GLP-1 receptor agonists and DPP-4 inhibitors in patients with T2DM is provided in Table 1,52,58 and an overview of incretin-based therapies is presented in Table 2.45,54,59 GLP-1 receptor agonists induce weight loss in patients with T2DM, while DPP-4 inhibitors are weight neutral.3,52,58,60 The GLP-1 receptor agonists are associated with a much higher incidence of adverse GI effects such as nausea and vomiting, presumably also attributable to the pharmacologic levels achieved.

 

 

Effects of incretin-based therapies

The number of people with T2DM, overweight/obesity, or CVD, alone or in combination, is approaching epidemic proportions, with the mechanisms of these conditions interrelated. Approximately 24 million Americans have diabetes, and T2DM accounts for more than 90% of these cases.61 Most patients with T2DM are not achieving HbA1c targets.62–64 About 60% of deaths among patients with T2DM are caused by CVD.65 Compounding the problem, overweight/obesity enhances the risk for CV-related morbidities in patients with diabetes.66 A cluster of metabolic disorders referred to as the metabolic syndrome (which includes hyperglycemia, measures of central obesity, and a series of significant CV risk factors) is common in patients with T2DM and CVD.67 Unfortunately, many antidiabetes drugs that successfully manage glycemic control also cause weight gain, which in theory may increase CV risk in patients with T2DM.68

Data from studies of patients with T2DM show that exenatide improves glycemic control and reduces body weight. Exenatide administered BID significantly reduced HbA1c (–0.40% to –0.86%) and weight (–1.6 kg to –2.8 kg) relative to baseline in three 30-week, placebo-controlled clinical trials.31,33,34 In subsequent 2-year, open-label extension studies, exenatide produced significant reductions from baseline in HbA1c (–20.9% at 30 weeks) and weight (–2.1 kg at 30 weeks). Both decreases were sustained through 2 years (HbA1c –1.1%, weight –4.7 kg) with a low incidence of hypoglycemia.31 Further post hoc analysis of the open-label extension of the 30-week trials followed patients treated with exenatide BID for 3 years or longer.69 In addition to markedly decreasing HbA1c from baseline levels (–1.1% at 3 years and –0.8% at up to 3.5 years; P < .0001), adjunctive exenatide produced significant reductions in body weight—up to –5.3 kg after 3.5 years of therapy.31,69 At 3.5 years, continued exenatide therapy resulted in a –6% reduction in low-density lipoprotein cholesterol, a 24% mean increase in high-density lipoprotein cholesterol, and a mean reduction in blood pressure of –2% to –4% from baseline levels. Improvements in hepatic biomarkers and homeostasis model assessment-B, a measure of beta-cell function, were seen after 2 and 3 years of exenatide treatment.31 Hypoglycemia was generally mild and transient.

In comparative head-to-head studies, exenatide BID and insulin analogues reduced HbA1c by similar magnitudes; yet exenatide treatment resulted in better control in terms of PPG and weight loss, while insulin glargine and insulin aspart produced weight gain.70–73

Mechanisms of cardioprotective effects

Although the mechanisms for the potential cardioprotective effects of GLP-1 and its receptor agonists remain to be fully elucidated, a recent study suggested that two novel pathways could be involved—one that is dependent on the known GLP-1 receptor pathway, and one that is independent of the GLP-1 receptor pathway.74 Correlating with observations of a potential cardioprotective effect, an infusion of recombinant GLP-1 in patients with acute myocardial infarction, when added to standard therapy, resulted in improved left ventricular function and was associated with reduced mortality.75 Evidence continues to accumulate for potential cardioprotective effects of the GLP-1 receptor agonists, indicating that they may have a positive impact on macro­vascular complications in patients with T2DM.

CONCLUSION

T2DM, which is often associated with overweight and obesity, remains a significant challenge worldwide. The broad spectrum of glucoregulatory actions of the incretin hormones GLP-1 and GIP, and their importance in maintaining glucose homeostasis, have been recognized and correlated with the pathogenesis of T2DM. An improved understanding of the roles played by GLP-1 and GIP in the pathogenesis of T2DM may provide clinicians with important details regarding the therapeutic application of incretin-based therapies, including the GLP-1 receptor agonist exenatide and the DPP-4 inhibitors sitagliptin and saxagliptin. Antidiabetes agents whose development is based on the multiple pharmacologic effects of incretin hormones can address the multifaceted nature of T2DM and overcome some current limitations of traditional therapies, especially those related to weight. This becomes more compelling given the close link among T2DM, obesity, and increased CV risk.

References
  1. Boyle PJ, Freeman JS. Application of incretin mimetics and dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors in managing type 2 diabetes mellitus. J Am Osteopath Assoc 2007; 107(suppl 3):S10–S16.
  2. Freeman JS. The pathophysiologic role of incretins. J Am Osteopath Assoc 2007; 107(suppl 3):S6–S9.
  3. Drucker DJ, Nauck MA. The incretin system: glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists and dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitors in type 2 diabetes. Lancet 2006; 368:1696–1705.
  4. Nauck MA, Baller B, Meier JJ. Gastric inhibitory polypeptide and glucagon-like peptide-1 in the pathogenesis of type 2 diabetes. Diabetes 2004; 53(suppl 3):S190–S196.
  5. Stonehouse A, Okerson T, Kendall D, Maggs D. Emerging incretin based therapies for type 2 diabetes: incretin mimetics and DPP-4 inhibitors. Curr Diabetes Rev 2008; 4:101–109.
  6. Huda MS, Wilding JP, Pinkney JH. Gut peptides and the regulation of appetite. Obes Rev 2006; 7:163–182.
  7. Elrick H, Stimmler L, Hlad CJ Jr, Arai Y. Plasma insulin response to oral and intravenous glucose administration. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1964; 24:1076–1082.
  8. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ. Biology of incretins: GLP-1 and GIP. Gastroenterology 2007; 132:2131–2157.
  9. Brown JC, Dryburgh JR, Ross SA, Dupré J. Identification and actions of gastric inhibitory polypeptide. Recent Prog Horm Res 1975; 31:487–532.
  10. Kreymann B, Williams G, Ghatei MA, Bloom SR. Glucagon-like peptide-1 7-36: a physiological incretin in man. Lancet 1987; 2:1300–1304.
  11. Nauck MA, Homberger E, Siegel EG, et al. Incretin effects of increasing glucose loads in man calculated from venous insulin and C-peptide responses. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1986; 63:492–498.
  12. Farilla L, Bulotta A, Hirshberg B, et al. Glucagon-like peptide 1 inhibits cell apoptosis and improves glucose responsiveness of freshly isolated human islets. Endocrinology 2003; 144:5149–5158.
  13. Van Gaal LF, Gutkin SW, Nauck MA. Exploiting the antidiabetic properties of incretins to treat type 2 diabetes mellitus: glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor agonists or insulin for patients with inadequate glycemic control? Eur J Endocrinol 2008; 158:773–784.
  14. Deacon CF, Nauck MA, Toft-Nielsen M, Pridal L, Willms B, Holst JJ. Both subcutaneously and intravenously administered glucagon-like peptide I are rapidly degraded from the NH2-terminus in type II diabetic patients and in healthy subjects. Diabetes 1995; 44:1126–1131.
  15. Dai H, Gustavson SM, Preston GM, Eskra JD, Calle R, Hirshberg B. Non-linear increase in GLP-1 levels in response to DPP-IV inhibition in healthy adult subjects. Diabetes Obes Metab 2008; 10:506–513.
  16. Nauck MA, Stöckmann F, Ebert R, Creutzfeldt W. Reduced incretin effect in type 2 (non-insulin-dependent) diabetes. Diabetologia 1986; 29:46–52.
  17. Phillips WT, Schwartz JG, McMahan CA. Rapid gastric emptying of an oral glucose solution in type 2 diabetic patients. J Nucl Med 1992; 33:1496–1500.
  18. Toft-Nielsen MB, Damholt MB, Madsbad S, et al. Determinants of the impaired secretion of glucagon-like peptide-1 in type 2 diabetic patients. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2001; 86:3717–3723.
  19. Nauck MA, Heimesaat MM, Orskov C, Holst JJ, Ebert R, Creutzfeldt W. Preserved incretin activity of glucagon-like peptide 1 [7-36 amide] but not of synthetic human gastric inhibitory polypeptide in patients with type-2 diabetes mellitus. J Clin Invest 1993; 91:301–307.
  20. Lynn FC, Thompson SA, Pospisilik JA, et al. A novel pathway for regulation of glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP) receptor expression in beta cells. FASEB J 2003; 17:91–93.
  21. Vaag AA, Holst JJ, Vølund A, Beck-Nielsen HB. Gut incretin hormones in identical twins discordant for non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM)—evidence for decreased glucagon-like peptide-1 secretion during oral glucose ingestion in NIDDM twins. Eur J Endocrinol 1996; 135:425–432.
  22. Meier JJ, Gallwitz B, Salmen S, et al. Normalization of glucose concentrations and deceleration of gastric emptying after solid meals during intravenous glucagon-like peptide 1 in patients with type 2 diabetes. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2003; 88:2719–2725.
  23. Nauck MA, Kleine N, Orskov C, Holst JJ, Willms B, Creutzfeldt W. Normalization of fasting hyperglycaemia by exogenous glucagon-like peptide 1 (7-36 amide) in type 2 (non-insulin-dependent) diabetic patients. Diabetologia 1993; 36:741–744.
  24. Knop FK, Vilsbøll T, Højberg PV, et al. Reduced incretin effect in type 2 diabetes: cause or consequence of the diabetic state? Diabetes 2007; 56:1951–1959.
  25. Lee YS, Shin S, Shigihara T, et al. Glucagon-like peptide-1 gene therapy in obese diabetic mice results in long-term cure of diabetes by improving insulin sensitivity and reducing hepatic gluconeogenesis. Diabetes 2007; 56:1671–1679.
  26. Muscelli E, Mari A, Casolaro A, et al. Separate impact of obesity and glucose tolerance on the incretin effect in normal subjects and type 2 diabetic patients. Diabetes 2008; 57:1340–1348.
  27. Nathan DM, Schreiber E, Fogel H, Mojsov S, Habener JF. Insulinotropic action of glucagonlike peptide-I-(7-37) in diabetic and nondiabetic subjects. Diabetes Care 1992; 15:270–276.
  28. Kolterman OG, Buse JB, Fineman MS, et al. Synthetic exendin-4 (exenatide) significantly reduces postprandial and fasting plasma glucose in subjects with type 2 diabetes. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2003; 88:3082–3089.
  29. Zander M, Madsbad S, Madsen JL, Holst JJ. Effect of 6-week course of glucagon-like peptide 1 on glycaemic control, insulin sensitivity, and beta-cell function in type 2 diabetes: a parallel-group study. Lancet 2002; 359:824–830.
  30. Kolterman OG, Kim DD, Shen L, et al. Pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, and safety of exenatide in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. Am J Health Syst Pharm 2005; 62:173–181.
  31. Buse JB, Henry RR, Han J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in sulfonylurea-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2628–2635.
  32. Byetta [package insert]. San Diego, CA: Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc.; 2009.
  33. DeFronzo RA, Ratner RE, Han J, Kim DD, Fineman MS, Baron AD. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control and weight over 30 weeks in metformin-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1092–1100.
  34. Kendall DM, Riddle MC, Rosenstock J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes treated with metformin and a sulfonylurea. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1083–1091.
  35. Zinman B, Hoogwerf BJ, Durán García S, et al. The effect of adding exenatide to a thiazolidinedione in suboptimally controlled type 2 diabetes: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2007; 146:477–485.
  36. Fehse F, Trautmann M, Holst JJ, et al. Exenatide augments first- and second-phase insulin secretion in response to intravenous glucose in subjects with type 2 diabetes. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2005; 90:5991–5997.
  37. Parkes DG, Pittner R, Jodka C, Smith P, Young A. Insulinotropic actions of exendin-4 and glucagon-like peptide-1 in vivo and in vitro. Metabolism 2001; 50:583–589.
  38. Linnebjerg H, Park S, Kothare PA, et al. Effect of exenatide on gastric emptying and relationship to postprandial glycemia in type 2 diabetes. Regul Pept 2008; 151:123–129.
  39. Cervera A, Wajcberg E, Sriwijitkamol A, et al. Mechanism of action of exenatide to reduce postprandial hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 2008; 294:E846–E852.
  40. Ionut V, Zheng D, Stefanovski D, Bergman RN. Exenatide can reduce glucose independent of islet hormones or gastric emptying. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 2008; 295:E269–E277.
  41. Kim D, MacConell L, Zhuang D, et al. Effects of once-weekly dosing of a long-acting release formulation of exenatide on glucose control and body weight in subjects with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2007; 30:1487–1493.
  42. Drucker DJ, Buse JB, Taylor K, et al. Exenatide once weekly versus twice daily for the treatment of type 2 diabetes: a randomised, open-label, non-inferiority study. Lancet 2008; 372:1240–1250.
  43. Knudsen LB, Nielsen PF, Huusfeldt PO, et al. Potent derivatives of glucagon-like peptide-1 with pharmacokinetic properties suitable for once daily administration. J Med Chem 2000; 43:1664–1669.
  44. Nauck M, Frid A, Hermansen K, et al; for the LEAD-2 Study Group. Efficacy and safety comparison of liraglutide, glimepiride, and placebo, all in combination with metformin, in type 2 diabetes: the LEAD (liraglutide effect and action in diabetes)-2 study. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:84–90.
  45. Committee for Medicinal Products for Human Use: Summary of Positive Opinion for Victoza. European Medicines Agency Web site. http://www.emea.europa.eu/pdfs/human/opinion/Victoza_14168909en.pdf. Published April 23, 2009. Accessed September 21, 2009.
  46. Garber A, Henry R, Ratner R, et al. Liraglutide versus glimepiride monotherapy for type 2 diabetes (LEAD-3 Mono): a randomised, 52-week, phase III, double-blind, parallel-treatment trial. Lancet 2009; 373:473–481.
  47. Marre M, Shaw J, Brändle M, et al. Liraglutide, a once-daily human GLP-1 analogue, added to a sulphonylurea over 26 weeks produces greater improvements in glycaemic and weight control compared with adding rosiglitazone or placebo in subjects with type 2 diabetes (LEAD-1 SU). Diabet Med 2009; 26:268–278.
  48. Aschner P, Kipnes MS, Lunceford JK, et al; for the Sitagliptin 021 Study Group. Effect of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy on glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2632–2637.
  49. Charbonnel B, Karasik A, Liu J, Wu M, Meininger G; for the Sitagliptin Study 020 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin added to ongoing metformin therapy in patients with type 2 diabetes inadequately controlled with metformin alone. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2638–2643.
  50. Raz I, Hanefeld M, Xu L, et al. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. Diabetologia 2006; 49:2564–2571.
  51. Rosenstock J, Brazg R, Andryuk PJ, Lu K, Stein P; for the Sitagliptin Study 019 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin added to ongoing pioglitazone therapy in patients with type 2 diabetes: a 24-week, multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, parallel-group study. Clin Ther 2006; 28:1556–1568.
  52. DeFronzo RA, Okerson T, Viswanathan P, Guan X, Holcombe JH, MacConell L. Effects of exenatide versus sitagliptin on postprandial glucose, insulin and glucagon secretion, gastric emptying, and caloric intake: a randomized, cross-over study. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:2943–2952.
  53. Herman GA, Stevens C, Van Dyck K, et al. Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of sitagliptin, an inhibitor of dipeptidyl peptidase IV, in healthy subjects: results from two randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled studies with single oral doses. Clin Pharmacol Ther 2005; 78:675–688.
  54. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ, Maida A, Lamont BJ. ADA 2008: incretin-based therapeutics. MedscapeCME Web site. http://www.medscape.com/viewprogram/15786. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  55. US Department of Health and Human Services. FDA approves new drug treatment for type 2 diabetes. US Food and Drug Administration Web site. http://www.fda.gov/newsevents/newsroom/pressannouncements/ucm174780.htm. Published July 31, 2009. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  56. Covington P, Christopher R, Davenport M, et al. Pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic, and tolerability profiles of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor alogliptin: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, multiple-dose study in adult patients with type 2 diabetes. Clin Ther 2008; 30:499–512.
  57. DeFronzo RA, Fleck PR, Wilson CA, Mekki Q; on behalf of the Alogliptin Study 010 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor alogliptin in patients with type 2 diabetes and inadequate glycemic control: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Diabetes Care 2008; 31:2315–2317.
  58. Triplitt CL, McGill JB, Porte D Jr, Conner CS. The changing landscape of type 2 diabetes: the role of incretin-based therapies in managed care outcomes. J Manag Care Pharm 2007; 13(9 suppl C):S2–S16.
  59. Garber AJ, Spann SJ. An overview of incretin clinical trials. J Fam Pract 2008; 57(9 suppl):S10–S18.
  60. Henry RR. Evolving concepts of type 2 diabetes management with oral medications: new approaches to an old disease. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:2189–2202.
  61. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. National diabetes fact sheet: general information and national estimates on diabetes in the United States, 2007. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention Web site. http://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/pubs/pdf/ndfs_2007.pdf. Published 2008. Accessed September 21, 2009.
  62. Ong KL, Cheung BM, Wong LY, Wt NM, Tan KC, Lam KS. Prevalence, treatment, and control of diagnosed diabetes in the U.S. National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey 1999–2004. Ann Epidemiol 2008; 18:222–229.
  63. Sanders CL, Yesupriya AJ, Curtin LR. Analysis of population structure and stratification in NHANES III self-reported race/ethnicities. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention Web site. http://www.cdc.gov/genomics/events/file/print/10year/08_pop_struct_ab.pdf. Accessed September 21, 2009.
  64. Koro CE, Bowlin SJ, Bourgeois N, Fedder DO. Glycemic control from 1988 to 2000 among US adults diagnosed with type 2 diabetes: a preliminary report. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:17–20.
  65. Haffner SM, Lehto S, Rönnemaa T, Pyörälä K, Laakso M. Mortality from coronary heart disease in subjects with type 2 diabetes and in nondiabetic subjects with and without prior myocardial infarction. N Engl J Med 1998; 339:229–234.
  66. Lloyd-Jones D, Adams R, Carnethon M, et al. Heart disease and stroke statistics—2009 update: a report from the American Heart Association Statistics Committee and Stroke Statistics Subcommittee. Circulation 2009; 119:480–486.
  67. Stonehouse AH, Holcombe JH, Kendall DM. GLP-1 analogues, DPP-IV inhibitors and the metabolic syndrome. In: Fonseca V, ed. Therapeutic Strategies in Metabolic Syndrome. Oxford, UK: Atlas Medical Publishing Ltd; 2008: 137–157.
  68. Purnell JQ, Weyer C. Weight effect of current and experimental drugs for diabetes mellitus: from promotion to alleviation of obesity. Treat Endocrinol 2003; 2:33–47.
  69. Klonoff DC, Buse JB, Nielsen LL, et al. Exenatide effects on diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular risk factors and hepatic biomarkers in patients with type 2 diabetes treated for at least 3 years. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:275–286.
  70. Barnett AH, Burger J, Johns D, et al. Tolerability and efficacy of exenatide and titrated insulin glargine in adult patients with type 2 diabetes previously uncontrolled with metformin or a sulfonylurea: a multinational, randomized, open-label, two-period, crossover noninferiority trial. Clin Ther 2007; 29:2333–2348.
  71. Glass LC, Qu Y, Lenox S, et al. Effects of exenatide versus insulin analogues on weight change in subjects with type 2 diabetes: a pooled post-hoc analysis. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:639–644.
  72. Heine RJ, Van Gaal LF, Johns D, Mihm MJ, Widel MH, Brodows RG; for the GWAA Study Group. Exenatide versus insulin glargine in patients with suboptimally controlled type 2 diabetes: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2005; 143:559–569.
  73. Nauck MA, Duran S, Kim D, et al. A comparison of twice-daily exenatide and biphasic insulin aspart in patients with type 2 diabetes who were suboptimally controlled with sulfonylurea and metformin: a non-inferiority study. Diabetologia 2007; 50:259–267.
  74. Ban K, Noyan-Ashraf MH, Hoefer J, Bolz SS, Drucker DJ, Husain M. Cardioprotective and vasodilatory actions of glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor are mediated through both glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor-dependent and -independent pathways. Circulation 2008; 117:2340–2350.
  75. Nikolaidis LA, Mankad S, Sokos GG, et al. Effects of glucagon-like peptide-1 in patients with acute myocardial infarction and left ventricular dysfunction after successful reperfusion. Circulation 2004; 109:962–965.
References
  1. Boyle PJ, Freeman JS. Application of incretin mimetics and dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors in managing type 2 diabetes mellitus. J Am Osteopath Assoc 2007; 107(suppl 3):S10–S16.
  2. Freeman JS. The pathophysiologic role of incretins. J Am Osteopath Assoc 2007; 107(suppl 3):S6–S9.
  3. Drucker DJ, Nauck MA. The incretin system: glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists and dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitors in type 2 diabetes. Lancet 2006; 368:1696–1705.
  4. Nauck MA, Baller B, Meier JJ. Gastric inhibitory polypeptide and glucagon-like peptide-1 in the pathogenesis of type 2 diabetes. Diabetes 2004; 53(suppl 3):S190–S196.
  5. Stonehouse A, Okerson T, Kendall D, Maggs D. Emerging incretin based therapies for type 2 diabetes: incretin mimetics and DPP-4 inhibitors. Curr Diabetes Rev 2008; 4:101–109.
  6. Huda MS, Wilding JP, Pinkney JH. Gut peptides and the regulation of appetite. Obes Rev 2006; 7:163–182.
  7. Elrick H, Stimmler L, Hlad CJ Jr, Arai Y. Plasma insulin response to oral and intravenous glucose administration. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1964; 24:1076–1082.
  8. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ. Biology of incretins: GLP-1 and GIP. Gastroenterology 2007; 132:2131–2157.
  9. Brown JC, Dryburgh JR, Ross SA, Dupré J. Identification and actions of gastric inhibitory polypeptide. Recent Prog Horm Res 1975; 31:487–532.
  10. Kreymann B, Williams G, Ghatei MA, Bloom SR. Glucagon-like peptide-1 7-36: a physiological incretin in man. Lancet 1987; 2:1300–1304.
  11. Nauck MA, Homberger E, Siegel EG, et al. Incretin effects of increasing glucose loads in man calculated from venous insulin and C-peptide responses. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 1986; 63:492–498.
  12. Farilla L, Bulotta A, Hirshberg B, et al. Glucagon-like peptide 1 inhibits cell apoptosis and improves glucose responsiveness of freshly isolated human islets. Endocrinology 2003; 144:5149–5158.
  13. Van Gaal LF, Gutkin SW, Nauck MA. Exploiting the antidiabetic properties of incretins to treat type 2 diabetes mellitus: glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor agonists or insulin for patients with inadequate glycemic control? Eur J Endocrinol 2008; 158:773–784.
  14. Deacon CF, Nauck MA, Toft-Nielsen M, Pridal L, Willms B, Holst JJ. Both subcutaneously and intravenously administered glucagon-like peptide I are rapidly degraded from the NH2-terminus in type II diabetic patients and in healthy subjects. Diabetes 1995; 44:1126–1131.
  15. Dai H, Gustavson SM, Preston GM, Eskra JD, Calle R, Hirshberg B. Non-linear increase in GLP-1 levels in response to DPP-IV inhibition in healthy adult subjects. Diabetes Obes Metab 2008; 10:506–513.
  16. Nauck MA, Stöckmann F, Ebert R, Creutzfeldt W. Reduced incretin effect in type 2 (non-insulin-dependent) diabetes. Diabetologia 1986; 29:46–52.
  17. Phillips WT, Schwartz JG, McMahan CA. Rapid gastric emptying of an oral glucose solution in type 2 diabetic patients. J Nucl Med 1992; 33:1496–1500.
  18. Toft-Nielsen MB, Damholt MB, Madsbad S, et al. Determinants of the impaired secretion of glucagon-like peptide-1 in type 2 diabetic patients. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2001; 86:3717–3723.
  19. Nauck MA, Heimesaat MM, Orskov C, Holst JJ, Ebert R, Creutzfeldt W. Preserved incretin activity of glucagon-like peptide 1 [7-36 amide] but not of synthetic human gastric inhibitory polypeptide in patients with type-2 diabetes mellitus. J Clin Invest 1993; 91:301–307.
  20. Lynn FC, Thompson SA, Pospisilik JA, et al. A novel pathway for regulation of glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP) receptor expression in beta cells. FASEB J 2003; 17:91–93.
  21. Vaag AA, Holst JJ, Vølund A, Beck-Nielsen HB. Gut incretin hormones in identical twins discordant for non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM)—evidence for decreased glucagon-like peptide-1 secretion during oral glucose ingestion in NIDDM twins. Eur J Endocrinol 1996; 135:425–432.
  22. Meier JJ, Gallwitz B, Salmen S, et al. Normalization of glucose concentrations and deceleration of gastric emptying after solid meals during intravenous glucagon-like peptide 1 in patients with type 2 diabetes. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2003; 88:2719–2725.
  23. Nauck MA, Kleine N, Orskov C, Holst JJ, Willms B, Creutzfeldt W. Normalization of fasting hyperglycaemia by exogenous glucagon-like peptide 1 (7-36 amide) in type 2 (non-insulin-dependent) diabetic patients. Diabetologia 1993; 36:741–744.
  24. Knop FK, Vilsbøll T, Højberg PV, et al. Reduced incretin effect in type 2 diabetes: cause or consequence of the diabetic state? Diabetes 2007; 56:1951–1959.
  25. Lee YS, Shin S, Shigihara T, et al. Glucagon-like peptide-1 gene therapy in obese diabetic mice results in long-term cure of diabetes by improving insulin sensitivity and reducing hepatic gluconeogenesis. Diabetes 2007; 56:1671–1679.
  26. Muscelli E, Mari A, Casolaro A, et al. Separate impact of obesity and glucose tolerance on the incretin effect in normal subjects and type 2 diabetic patients. Diabetes 2008; 57:1340–1348.
  27. Nathan DM, Schreiber E, Fogel H, Mojsov S, Habener JF. Insulinotropic action of glucagonlike peptide-I-(7-37) in diabetic and nondiabetic subjects. Diabetes Care 1992; 15:270–276.
  28. Kolterman OG, Buse JB, Fineman MS, et al. Synthetic exendin-4 (exenatide) significantly reduces postprandial and fasting plasma glucose in subjects with type 2 diabetes. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2003; 88:3082–3089.
  29. Zander M, Madsbad S, Madsen JL, Holst JJ. Effect of 6-week course of glucagon-like peptide 1 on glycaemic control, insulin sensitivity, and beta-cell function in type 2 diabetes: a parallel-group study. Lancet 2002; 359:824–830.
  30. Kolterman OG, Kim DD, Shen L, et al. Pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, and safety of exenatide in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. Am J Health Syst Pharm 2005; 62:173–181.
  31. Buse JB, Henry RR, Han J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in sulfonylurea-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:2628–2635.
  32. Byetta [package insert]. San Diego, CA: Amylin Pharmaceuticals, Inc.; 2009.
  33. DeFronzo RA, Ratner RE, Han J, Kim DD, Fineman MS, Baron AD. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control and weight over 30 weeks in metformin-treated patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1092–1100.
  34. Kendall DM, Riddle MC, Rosenstock J, et al. Effects of exenatide (exendin-4) on glycemic control over 30 weeks in patients with type 2 diabetes treated with metformin and a sulfonylurea. Diabetes Care 2005; 28:1083–1091.
  35. Zinman B, Hoogwerf BJ, Durán García S, et al. The effect of adding exenatide to a thiazolidinedione in suboptimally controlled type 2 diabetes: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2007; 146:477–485.
  36. Fehse F, Trautmann M, Holst JJ, et al. Exenatide augments first- and second-phase insulin secretion in response to intravenous glucose in subjects with type 2 diabetes. J Clin Endocrinol Metab 2005; 90:5991–5997.
  37. Parkes DG, Pittner R, Jodka C, Smith P, Young A. Insulinotropic actions of exendin-4 and glucagon-like peptide-1 in vivo and in vitro. Metabolism 2001; 50:583–589.
  38. Linnebjerg H, Park S, Kothare PA, et al. Effect of exenatide on gastric emptying and relationship to postprandial glycemia in type 2 diabetes. Regul Pept 2008; 151:123–129.
  39. Cervera A, Wajcberg E, Sriwijitkamol A, et al. Mechanism of action of exenatide to reduce postprandial hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 2008; 294:E846–E852.
  40. Ionut V, Zheng D, Stefanovski D, Bergman RN. Exenatide can reduce glucose independent of islet hormones or gastric emptying. Am J Physiol Endocrinol Metab 2008; 295:E269–E277.
  41. Kim D, MacConell L, Zhuang D, et al. Effects of once-weekly dosing of a long-acting release formulation of exenatide on glucose control and body weight in subjects with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2007; 30:1487–1493.
  42. Drucker DJ, Buse JB, Taylor K, et al. Exenatide once weekly versus twice daily for the treatment of type 2 diabetes: a randomised, open-label, non-inferiority study. Lancet 2008; 372:1240–1250.
  43. Knudsen LB, Nielsen PF, Huusfeldt PO, et al. Potent derivatives of glucagon-like peptide-1 with pharmacokinetic properties suitable for once daily administration. J Med Chem 2000; 43:1664–1669.
  44. Nauck M, Frid A, Hermansen K, et al; for the LEAD-2 Study Group. Efficacy and safety comparison of liraglutide, glimepiride, and placebo, all in combination with metformin, in type 2 diabetes: the LEAD (liraglutide effect and action in diabetes)-2 study. Diabetes Care 2009; 32:84–90.
  45. Committee for Medicinal Products for Human Use: Summary of Positive Opinion for Victoza. European Medicines Agency Web site. http://www.emea.europa.eu/pdfs/human/opinion/Victoza_14168909en.pdf. Published April 23, 2009. Accessed September 21, 2009.
  46. Garber A, Henry R, Ratner R, et al. Liraglutide versus glimepiride monotherapy for type 2 diabetes (LEAD-3 Mono): a randomised, 52-week, phase III, double-blind, parallel-treatment trial. Lancet 2009; 373:473–481.
  47. Marre M, Shaw J, Brändle M, et al. Liraglutide, a once-daily human GLP-1 analogue, added to a sulphonylurea over 26 weeks produces greater improvements in glycaemic and weight control compared with adding rosiglitazone or placebo in subjects with type 2 diabetes (LEAD-1 SU). Diabet Med 2009; 26:268–278.
  48. Aschner P, Kipnes MS, Lunceford JK, et al; for the Sitagliptin 021 Study Group. Effect of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy on glycemic control in patients with type 2 diabetes. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2632–2637.
  49. Charbonnel B, Karasik A, Liu J, Wu M, Meininger G; for the Sitagliptin Study 020 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin added to ongoing metformin therapy in patients with type 2 diabetes inadequately controlled with metformin alone. Diabetes Care 2006; 29:2638–2643.
  50. Raz I, Hanefeld M, Xu L, et al. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin as monotherapy in patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus. Diabetologia 2006; 49:2564–2571.
  51. Rosenstock J, Brazg R, Andryuk PJ, Lu K, Stein P; for the Sitagliptin Study 019 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor sitagliptin added to ongoing pioglitazone therapy in patients with type 2 diabetes: a 24-week, multicenter, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, parallel-group study. Clin Ther 2006; 28:1556–1568.
  52. DeFronzo RA, Okerson T, Viswanathan P, Guan X, Holcombe JH, MacConell L. Effects of exenatide versus sitagliptin on postprandial glucose, insulin and glucagon secretion, gastric emptying, and caloric intake: a randomized, cross-over study. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:2943–2952.
  53. Herman GA, Stevens C, Van Dyck K, et al. Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of sitagliptin, an inhibitor of dipeptidyl peptidase IV, in healthy subjects: results from two randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled studies with single oral doses. Clin Pharmacol Ther 2005; 78:675–688.
  54. Baggio LL, Drucker DJ, Maida A, Lamont BJ. ADA 2008: incretin-based therapeutics. MedscapeCME Web site. http://www.medscape.com/viewprogram/15786. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  55. US Department of Health and Human Services. FDA approves new drug treatment for type 2 diabetes. US Food and Drug Administration Web site. http://www.fda.gov/newsevents/newsroom/pressannouncements/ucm174780.htm. Published July 31, 2009. Accessed September 18, 2009.
  56. Covington P, Christopher R, Davenport M, et al. Pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic, and tolerability profiles of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor alogliptin: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled, multiple-dose study in adult patients with type 2 diabetes. Clin Ther 2008; 30:499–512.
  57. DeFronzo RA, Fleck PR, Wilson CA, Mekki Q; on behalf of the Alogliptin Study 010 Group. Efficacy and safety of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor alogliptin in patients with type 2 diabetes and inadequate glycemic control: a randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled study. Diabetes Care 2008; 31:2315–2317.
  58. Triplitt CL, McGill JB, Porte D Jr, Conner CS. The changing landscape of type 2 diabetes: the role of incretin-based therapies in managed care outcomes. J Manag Care Pharm 2007; 13(9 suppl C):S2–S16.
  59. Garber AJ, Spann SJ. An overview of incretin clinical trials. J Fam Pract 2008; 57(9 suppl):S10–S18.
  60. Henry RR. Evolving concepts of type 2 diabetes management with oral medications: new approaches to an old disease. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:2189–2202.
  61. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. National diabetes fact sheet: general information and national estimates on diabetes in the United States, 2007. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention Web site. http://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/pubs/pdf/ndfs_2007.pdf. Published 2008. Accessed September 21, 2009.
  62. Ong KL, Cheung BM, Wong LY, Wt NM, Tan KC, Lam KS. Prevalence, treatment, and control of diagnosed diabetes in the U.S. National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey 1999–2004. Ann Epidemiol 2008; 18:222–229.
  63. Sanders CL, Yesupriya AJ, Curtin LR. Analysis of population structure and stratification in NHANES III self-reported race/ethnicities. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention Web site. http://www.cdc.gov/genomics/events/file/print/10year/08_pop_struct_ab.pdf. Accessed September 21, 2009.
  64. Koro CE, Bowlin SJ, Bourgeois N, Fedder DO. Glycemic control from 1988 to 2000 among US adults diagnosed with type 2 diabetes: a preliminary report. Diabetes Care 2004; 27:17–20.
  65. Haffner SM, Lehto S, Rönnemaa T, Pyörälä K, Laakso M. Mortality from coronary heart disease in subjects with type 2 diabetes and in nondiabetic subjects with and without prior myocardial infarction. N Engl J Med 1998; 339:229–234.
  66. Lloyd-Jones D, Adams R, Carnethon M, et al. Heart disease and stroke statistics—2009 update: a report from the American Heart Association Statistics Committee and Stroke Statistics Subcommittee. Circulation 2009; 119:480–486.
  67. Stonehouse AH, Holcombe JH, Kendall DM. GLP-1 analogues, DPP-IV inhibitors and the metabolic syndrome. In: Fonseca V, ed. Therapeutic Strategies in Metabolic Syndrome. Oxford, UK: Atlas Medical Publishing Ltd; 2008: 137–157.
  68. Purnell JQ, Weyer C. Weight effect of current and experimental drugs for diabetes mellitus: from promotion to alleviation of obesity. Treat Endocrinol 2003; 2:33–47.
  69. Klonoff DC, Buse JB, Nielsen LL, et al. Exenatide effects on diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular risk factors and hepatic biomarkers in patients with type 2 diabetes treated for at least 3 years. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:275–286.
  70. Barnett AH, Burger J, Johns D, et al. Tolerability and efficacy of exenatide and titrated insulin glargine in adult patients with type 2 diabetes previously uncontrolled with metformin or a sulfonylurea: a multinational, randomized, open-label, two-period, crossover noninferiority trial. Clin Ther 2007; 29:2333–2348.
  71. Glass LC, Qu Y, Lenox S, et al. Effects of exenatide versus insulin analogues on weight change in subjects with type 2 diabetes: a pooled post-hoc analysis. Curr Med Res Opin 2008; 24:639–644.
  72. Heine RJ, Van Gaal LF, Johns D, Mihm MJ, Widel MH, Brodows RG; for the GWAA Study Group. Exenatide versus insulin glargine in patients with suboptimally controlled type 2 diabetes: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2005; 143:559–569.
  73. Nauck MA, Duran S, Kim D, et al. A comparison of twice-daily exenatide and biphasic insulin aspart in patients with type 2 diabetes who were suboptimally controlled with sulfonylurea and metformin: a non-inferiority study. Diabetologia 2007; 50:259–267.
  74. Ban K, Noyan-Ashraf MH, Hoefer J, Bolz SS, Drucker DJ, Husain M. Cardioprotective and vasodilatory actions of glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor are mediated through both glucagon-like peptide 1 receptor-dependent and -independent pathways. Circulation 2008; 117:2340–2350.
  75. Nikolaidis LA, Mankad S, Sokos GG, et al. Effects of glucagon-like peptide-1 in patients with acute myocardial infarction and left ventricular dysfunction after successful reperfusion. Circulation 2004; 109:962–965.
Page Number
S12-S19
Page Number
S12-S19
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Role of the incretin pathway in the pathogenesis of type 2 diabetes mellitus
Display Headline
Role of the incretin pathway in the pathogenesis of type 2 diabetes mellitus
Citation Override
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine 2009 December;76(suppl 5):S12-S19
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • The incretin effect may be responsible for up to 70% of insulin secretion following oral glucose ingestion; reduction of the incretin effect contributes to T2DM pathophysiology.
  • It is unknown whether incretin defects are a cause or consequence of T2DM.
  • Incretin therapies effectively lower glucose with concomitant favorable effects on body weight. GLP-1 receptor agonists reduce weight, while DPP-4 inhibitors are weight neutral.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 08:30
Un-Gate On Date
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 08:30
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Fri, 04/13/2018 - 08:30
Article PDF Media